Yamaha RX-V1700 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V1700

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: Manual de usuario

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V1700

Printed in Malaysia WH63550

RX-V1700

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main

room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power

plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Remote control........................................................... 6

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 8

Preparing the remote control ..................................... 9

Front panel display .................................................. 10

Rear panel ................................................................ 12

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13

Placing speakers....................................................... 13

Connecting speakers ................................................ 14

Using bi-amplification connections......................... 17

Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 18

Information on HDMI.............................................. 19

Audio and video signal flow.................................... 20

Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 21

Connecting other components ................................. 22

Connecting a multi-format player

or an external decoder ......................................... 26

Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 27

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 27

Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 28

Connecting the power cable..................................... 29

Setting the speaker impedance................................. 30

Turning on and off the power .................................. 31

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 32

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 38

Basic procedure ....................................................... 38

Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 40

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 41

Using your headphones............................................ 41

Muting the audio output........................................... 41

Displaying the input source information ................. 42

Playing video sources

in the background of an audio source.................. 43

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 43

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS............................. 44

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 44

Sound field program descriptions ............................ 45

Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 49

USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 50

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 50

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 50

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 51

Enjoying multi-channel sources

in 2-channel stereo............................................... 51

Selecting the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode .................................................... 52

Selecting the night listening mode........................... 53

FM/AM TUNING..................................................54

FM/AM controls and functions ............................... 54

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 55

Manual tuning .......................................................... 56

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 57

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 58

Selecting preset stations........................................... 59

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 60

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ...................61

Connecting the XM Passport System ...................... 61

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 62

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 63

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 65

Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 70

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 71

USING iPod ...........................................................73

Controlling iPod ...................................................... 73

RECORDING ........................................................75

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS.....76

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 76

Selecting decoders ................................................... 80

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT

(MANUAL SETUP) ..........................................84

Using SET MENU ................................................... 86

1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 87

2 SOUND MENU.................................................... 91

3 INPUT MENU...................................................... 94

4 OPTION MENU................................................... 97

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................101

Controlling this unit, a TV,

or other components .......................................... 101

Setting remote control codes ................................. 103

Programming codes from other remote controls ... 105

Changing source names in the display window..... 106

Macro programming features ................................ 107

Clearing configurations ......................................... 110

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ...113

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 113

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 114

ADVANCED SETUP ..........................................117

Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................. 117

Setting remote control ID ...................................... 119

TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................122

RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................130

GLOSSARY.........................................................131

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

INFORMATION .............................................134

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER

INFORMATION .............................................135

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................136

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX (at the end of this manual)

• SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD

PROGRAM

• LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

FEATURES

2 En

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 130 W + 130 W

Center: 130 W

Surround: 130 W + 130 W

Surround back: 130 W + 130 W

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx

decoder

◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

XM Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Passport

System” sold separately)

◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound

content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels,

resulting in a full surround sound experience

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal

transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on

HDMI version 1.2a

◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI

digital video) capability for monitor out

iPod controlling capability

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod

(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

Other features

◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-

channel input

◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i

(NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3

COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality stereo

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and

macro capability

◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility

◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS

◆ Sleep timer

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

FEATURES

iPod

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

GETTING STARTED

3 En

INTRODUCTION

Check that you received all of the following parts.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the

button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in

parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements,

etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAN

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

Remote control

Batteries (6)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphoneSpeaker terminal wrench Power cable

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia, General,

and Korea models)

Indoor FM antenna

(Europe, U.K. and Australia models)

TUNER

CD-R

DTV

PHONO

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

VCR 1

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR/VCR 2

POWER

STANDBY

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

NUMBER

CAT.

ALL

PRESET

DISPLAY

MUTE

ENT

Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control

(except Europe model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

4 En

This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about

other control and functions.

• AM/FM tuning ........................... see page 54

• XM satellite radio tuning ........... see page 62

1 MASTER ON/OFF

Turns this unit on or off (see page 31).

2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode

(see page 31).

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

3 INPUT selector

Selects the desired input source (see page 38).

4 AUDIO SELECT

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and

“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or

more input jacks (see page 40).

5 TONE CONTROL

Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left, front right

and center channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM

selector (see page 50).

6 STRAIGHT

Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the

“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-

channel input signals are output directly from their

respective speakers without effect processing (see

page 49).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLU ME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

UNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

32 BA09

GFEDC

876541

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

5 En

INTRODUCTION

7 MULTI ZONE buttons

ZONE 2 ON/OFF

Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode.

See page 114 for details.

ZONE 3 ON/OFF

Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode.

See page 114 for details.

These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF

is pressed inward to the ON position.

ZONE CONTROLS

Switches the zone you want to control between the

main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. See page 114 for

details.

After you press ZONE CONTROLS, the indicator for the

currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for

approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing,

perform the desired operation.

8 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this unit

(see page 10).

9 ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode

(see page 52).

0 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control (see page 9).

A NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53).

B PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 50).

C PROGRAM selector

• Selects sound field programs (see page 44).

• Adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with

TONE CONTROL (see page 50).

D OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied

optimizer microphone in the “AUTO SETUP” procedure

(see page 32).

E PHONES jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones (see page 41).

F VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console or a video camera

(see page 27).

To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select

“V-AUX” as the input source.

The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel

take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

G VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.

■ Opening and closing the front panel

door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

Note

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

6 En

■ Remote control controls and functions

This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about

other control and functions.

• AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54

• XM satellite radio tuning ........................ see page 62

• Controlling a TV ................................... see page 101

• Controlling other components ............... see page 102

• Controlling option components ............. see page 103

The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded

area below depends on the operation mode selector position. Set

the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate (see page 9).

2 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source you want to control.

The selected input source name appears in the display window on

the remote control showing which source is currently operational.

4 Display window

Shows the name of the selected input source that you can

control.

5 LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

output level (see page 51).

6 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER

Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or

the “SET MENU” parameters.

7 RETURN

Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the

“SET MENU” parameters.

8 Sound field program selector buttons

Select sound field programs (see page 44).

9 SUR. DECODE

Activates decoders to play back 2-channel sources in

surround (see page 80).

Remote control

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

AND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

7 En

INTRODUCTION

0 MACRO ON/OFF

Turns on or off the macro function (see page 107).

A MACRO

Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a

single button (see page 107).

B STANDBY

Sets the main zone to the standby mode (see page 31).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

C POWER

Turns on the main zone (see page 31).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

D AUDIO SEL

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and

“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or

more input jacks (see page 40).

E SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 43).

F MULTI CH IN

Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external

decoder, etc. (see page 41).

G SELECT k / n

Selects another input source that you can control

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons.

H Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons

in the shaded area.

AMP

Operates the amplifier function of this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (see page 102).

Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or

PHONO (see page 101).

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 103.

• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and

PHONO (see page 103), priority is given to the one set for

DTV/CBL.

I VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

J MUTE

Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level (see page 41).

K PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the pure direct mode (see page 50).

L SET MENU

Enters “SET MENU” (see page 86).

M PAR AMET ER

Displays sound field parameter settings in the on-screen

display (OSD) (see page 76).

N STRAIGHT

Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the

“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-

channel input signals are output directly from their

respective speakers without effect processing (see

page 49).

O EXTD SUR.

Switches between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of

multi-channel sources (see page 80).

P SELECT

Selects decoders for 2-channel sources (see pages 80 and

82).

Q ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode

(see page 52).

R NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53).

S RENAME

Changes the name of the input source in the display

window (see page 106).

T CLEAR

Clears remote control functions acquired from the learn,

macro and/or rename features (see page 110).

U LEARN

Programs remote control codes of functions from other

remote controls (see page 105).

Note

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

8 En

This section describes the function of each control on the

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control the amplifier

functions of Zone 2 or Zone 3.

See the following pages for details about other controls

and functions.

• AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54

• XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................... see page 62

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control is supplied with U.S.A., Canada,

Australia, U.K., China, Asia and General models only.

1 Input selector buttons

Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3.

2 ID1/ID2 switch

Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2

(see page 104).

3 POWER

Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

4 STANDBY

Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

5 VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3.

6 MUTE

Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to

restore the audio output to the previous volume level.

7 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch

Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that

of Zone 3.

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control

Note

TUNER

CD-R

DTV

PHONO

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

VCR 1

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR/VCR 2

POWER

STANDBY

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

NUMBER

CAT.

ALL

PRESET

DISPLAY

MUTE

ENT

(U.S.A. model)

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

9 En

INTRODUCTION

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control (Except Europe model)

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings

(+ and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes

dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

■ Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Preparing the remote control

Notes

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

10 En

The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when

“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 65.

1 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 19).

2 DOCK indicator

Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit

(see page 27).

3 Battery charge indicator

Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the

stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit. (see

page 73).

4 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

5 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the current volume level.

6 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 41).

7 Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

8 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

9 Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Light up according to the number of presence and

surround back speakers set for “PRESENCE SP” (see

page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND

MENU” when “TEST” in “SOUND MENU” is set to

“ON” (see page 92).

You can make settings for the presence and surround back

speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see

page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE SP”

(see page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND

MENU”.

Front panel display

Note

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

DTV

MUTE

VOLUME

LFE

LL C R

SL SB SR

HiFi DSP

DIGITAL

PL x

DSD

neural

PCM

VIRTUAL

YPAO

ENHANCER

MATRIX

DISCRETE

CINEMA

SILENT

96/24

TUNED

STEREO

AUTO

MEMORY

ZONE2

ZONE3

SLEEP

PTY HOLD

PTY

EON

NIGHT

DOCK

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DVR/VCR 2

V-AUX

DSD

neural

PCM

TUNED

STEREO

AUTO

MEMORY

ZONE2

ZONE3

SLEEP

PTY HOLD

PTY

EON

NIGHT

HiFi DSP

DIGITAL

PL x

VIRTUAL

YPAO

ENHANCER

MATRIX

DISCRETE

CINEMA

SILENT

654321

0........ U.S.A. and Canada models only

P........ U.K. and Europe models only

Presence speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Surround back speaker indicators

L CR

SL SB SR

LFE

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

11 En

INTRODUCTION

0 neural indicator

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Lights up when the Neural Surround decoder is activated

(see page 81).

A DSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP

sound field programs are selected.

CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (see page 45).

HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 45).

B VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 49).

C YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the

speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without

any modifications (see page 32).

D DSD indicator

Lights up when this unit is producing DSD (Direct Stream

Digital) digital audio signals.

E ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

turned on (see page 52).

F PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

G Dolby decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the Dolby

decoders of this unit function.

H Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

I Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 41).

J SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 49).

K DTS decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the DTS

decoders of this unit function.

L Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite

Radio tuning mode.

TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station

(see page 54).

STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal

for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator

is lit (see page 54).

AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning

mode (see page 54).

MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show that a station can be stored

(see page 57).

M ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators

Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on

(see page 114).

N NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode

(see page 53).

O SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 43).

P Radio Data System indicators

(U.K. and Europe models only)

PS, PTY, RT and CT

Light up according to the selected Radio Data System

display mode.

EON

Lights up when the EON data service is being

received.

PTY HOLD

Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Surround left

DSP sound field

Surround right

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

12 En

1 REMOTE jacks

See page 113 for details.

2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

See pages 21 and 22 for connection information.

3 Audio component jacks

See page 24 for connection information.

4 Video component jacks

See pages 21 and 22 for connection information.

5 ANTENNA terminals

See page 28 for connection information.

6 WRENCH HOLDER

Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when

not in use (see page 15).

7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

See page 29 for details.

8 AC IN/OUTLET(S)

See page 29 for connection information.

9 HDMI connectors

See page 19 for connection information.

0 DOCK terminal

See page 27 for connection information.

A XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

See page 61 for connection information.

B DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks

See page 22 for connection information.

C CONTROL OUT jack

This is a control expansion terminal for custom

installation.

D RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.

Consult your dealer for details.

E Speaker terminals

See page 14 for connection information.

F MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 26 for connection information.

G PRE OUT jacks

See page 25 for connection information.

H ZONE OUT jacks

See page 113 for connection information.

Rear panel

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

SB(8CH)

8765432

HGF

EDCBA09

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

HDMI

AUDIO

DOCK

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

CONTROL OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVR/

VCR2

COAXIAL

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

MD/

TAP E

CD-R

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DTV

TAP E

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DVD

DVR/ VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

OUT

ININ

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

SAT

CBL/

IN 2

OUT

A B

DVD

IN 1

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CONNECTIONS

13 En

PREPARATION

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we

recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Place the

center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as

close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or

under it.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back left and right speakers

(SBL and SBR)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as that of the front speakers.

Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 134). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 to 1 m (1

to 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward,

and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass

frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high

fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS

sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical,

because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it

is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers.

Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce

wall reflections.

CONNECTIONS

Placing speakers

SBR

SBL

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

PRPL

1.8 m (6 ft)

30 cm (12 in) or more

1.8 m (6 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

14 En

CONNECTIONS

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be

unnatural and lack bass.

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 31).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this

unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the

monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see

page 30). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 118).

• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the

plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89)

are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87).

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set

to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 89).

• You can use the PRESENCE terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 113).

Connecting speakers

Notes

CAUTION

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SINGLE

SP2

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SP1

Front speakers

Surround speakers

(U.S.A. model)

Presence speakers

Subwoofer

Right

Left

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

Right

Left

Right

Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers

(see page 113)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

15 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

FRONT terminals

Connect front left and right speakers to these terminals.

CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

SURROUND terminals

Connect surround left and right speakers to these

terminals.

SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back left and right speakers to these

terminals.

When you use a surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the

left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE).

PRESENCE terminals

Connect presence left and right speakers to these

terminals.

SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System)

to this jack.

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the

supplied speaker terminal wrench.

Note

10 mm (0.4 in)

Speaker terminal wrench

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

16 En

CONNECTIONS

5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the

WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this

unit when not in use.

■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker

terminals

Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see

page 113).

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the

terminal.

3 Close the tab to secure the wire.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea

models)

The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector

widely used to terminate speaker cables.

1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

2 Insert the banana plug connector into the

end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals.

Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the

terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

17 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Some of the speakers have speaker wire connections that

allow bi-amplification to enhance the performance of the

speaker system. This unit allows you to make bi-

amplification connection to one speaker system. Check if

your speakers support bi-amplification. As these speakers

are shipped to you, you will note shorting bars or bridges,

one connecting the two red input terminals and the other

connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these

shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-amplify

your speakers.

■ Conventional connection

If you want to connect your speakers as traditional

loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,

connect your speakers using the regular left and right

speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of

terminals.

■ Bi-amplification connection

To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT

and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To

activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”

to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 119).

Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low

pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.

Using bi-amplification connections

FRONT

+ +

This unit

Shorting bars

or bridges

Shorting bars

or bridges

Front speakers

Right Left

Note

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

FRONT

SINGLE

This unit

Front speakers

Left

Right

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

18 En

CONNECTIONS

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit equips the video connection function. See pages 20 and

97 for details.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y R PB P

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

19 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

This unit has the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI OUT jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output. Connect

the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD

player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a

projector).

The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of the selected input source are output at the

HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 42).

■ HDMI compatibility with this unit

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16

feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the

HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to

establish the connection to the component.

• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video

and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be

output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “V CONV.” to “ON” in

“MANUAL SETUP” (see page 98) to activate this feature.

Information on HDMI

Note

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

HDMI

components

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch,

2.8224 MHz,1 bit

SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following

standards:

• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by

HDMI Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed

by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

Notes

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

20 En

CONNECTIONS

■ Audio signal flow

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be

output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO”

is set to “OTHER” (see page 93).

• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the

analog AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

■ Video signal flow

• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT

VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the

input signals is as follows:

1. COMPONENT VIDEO

2. S VIDEO

3. VIDEO

• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to

480p/576p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to

activate this feature (see page 98).

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.

• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i

(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite

video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 98) and

HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) are

available only when “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97).

• Use the “HDMI I/P” parameter in “OPTION MENU” to

deinterlace the analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT

jack (see page 98). When the analog video signals with 1080i or

720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the

HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen.

• The OSD signal is not output at the VCR 1 OUT and

DVR/VCR 2 OUT jacks and is not recorded.

• The color of the letters and images in the OSD may differ

depending on the input signals and your video monitor.

Audio and video signal flow

Notes

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog output

Digital output

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

Output

HDMI interlace/progressive

up-conversion (see page 98)

Component interlace/progressive

up-conversion (see page 98)

Input

Video conversion (see page 97)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

21 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the

rear panel of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio

signals (see page 93).

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they

are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

• Set “V CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the short message display and parameter displays.

• Set “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the parameter displays.

• The SET MENU and parameter displays appear with the gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting

of the parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (see page 97).

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Notes

CAUTION

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

MONITOR OUT

OUT

PRPB

(or projector)

(U.S.A. model)

Video in

Component video in

S-video in

HDMI in

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

22 En

CONNECTIONS

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

• When “V CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 97), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see

page 21). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to

the VIDEO jacks.

• When “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When

recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”

(see page 94).

• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is

given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.

• The parameter displays do not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p are input.

• The parameter and short message displays do not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p

resolutions are input and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack.

■ Connecting a DVD player

Connecting other components

Notes

CAUTION

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

DVD

OPTICAL

DVD

IN 1

PR PB Y

(U.S.A. model)

DVD player

HDMI out

Coaxial out

Component out

S-video out Video out

Optical out

Audio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

23 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR

When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR 1 terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO

OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR/VCR 2 terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.

■ Connecting set-top boxes

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

DVR/

VCR2

COAXIAL

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

OUT

ININ

DVR/VCR 2

(U.S.A. model)

DVD recorder, PVR or VCR

Coaxial out

S-video out

Video out

Audio in

Video in

S-video in

Audio out

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

NENT VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

DTV

CBL/

SAT

OPTICAL

DTV

CBL/SAT

DTV

CBL/SAT

CBL/

IN 2

SAT

PR PB Y

L R

PR PB Y

(U.S.A. model)

HDTV decoder

Satellite receiver,

cable TV receiver

HDMI out

Component out

Video out

Audio out

S-video out

Video out

Audio out

Optical out

Component out

Optical out

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

24 En

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting audio components

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O

ASSIGNMENT” (see page 94).

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.

• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-

output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.

• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,

the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.

Notes

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

COAXIAL

MD/

TA PE

CD-R

OPTICAL

TA PE

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

LR LRLRLR

(U.S.A. model)

CD recorder

Turntable

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

Audio in

Optical inAudio out

Optical

out

Audio

out

Optical in

Ground

Audio out

Coaxial

out

Audio

out

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

25 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting an external amplifier

This unit has more than enough power for any home use.

However, if you want to add more power to the speaker

output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an

external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.

• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not

make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.

• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE

OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see

page 50).

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer (see page 51).

• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see

page 87) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87).

1 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel output jack.

2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel output jacks.

3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks

Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.

• Set the “SB L/R SP” to “LRGx2”, “LRGx1”, “SMLx2” or

“SMLx1” and “PRESENCE SP” to “NONE” (see page 89) to

output the surround back channel signals at SURROUND

BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.

• Set the “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” and “SB L/R SP” to

“NONE” (see page 89) to output the presence channel signals at

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.

5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

Notes

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

4321

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

26 En

CONNECTIONS

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or

pre-amplifier.

If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 96), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT”

in MULTI CH SET (see page 96) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 41), this unit automatically

turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in

“MULTI CH SET” (see page 96).

Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder

Notes

MULTI CH INPUT

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

SURROUND

SB(8CH)

Subwoofer

out

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Center out

Surround

out

Front out

Note

MULTI CH INPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

SURROUND

SB(8CH)

TAPE

MD/

(C)

()

LRLR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front out

Subwoofer

out

Center out

Surround back out

Surround out

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

27 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear

panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)

where you can station your iPod and control playback of

your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a

YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold

separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this

unit using its dedicated cable.

Do not connect this unit to the AC power supply

until all connections between components are

complete.

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit.

Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and

other components before making connections.

The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel

take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

Connecting a YAMAHA iPod

universal dock

CAUTION

DOCK

YAMAHA iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10,

sold separately)

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the

front panel

Note

CAUTION

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

(U.S.A. model)

Optical

output

Video

output

S-Video

output

Audio

output

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

28 En

CONNECTIONS

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals. In general, these antennas should provide

sufficient signal strength.

• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General

models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area

(see page 119).

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna.

2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT

terminal.

3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires

into the AM ANT terminal.

4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal.

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the

other lead wire to the GND terminal.

Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to

this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception

when you tune into AM stations (see page 54).

Connecting the FM and AM antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

(U.S.A. model)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8

ft) vinyl-covered wire

extended outdoors from a

window.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

29 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting the AC power cable

Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire or

electrical shock.

Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power

cable into an AC wall outlet.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of

this unit must be set for your local voltage

BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE

SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and

create a potential fire hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a

straight slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model ............................................................... None

Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to

these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For

information on the maximum power or the total power

consumption of the components that can be connected to

these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 136.

Connecting the power cable

CAUTION

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

(U.S.A. model)

To the AC wall outlet

CAUTION

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

30 En

CONNECTIONS

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this

unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the

front speakers.

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

See page 31 for details about turning on or off this

unit.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel

and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to

the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select “SPEAKER IMP.”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel

repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

Setting the speaker impedance

CAUTION

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

2,432,5

(U.S.A. model)

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

PROGRAM

MIN

IMP.SPEAKER

Note

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MIN

IMP.SPEAKER

MASTER

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

31 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

inward to the ON position to turn on this

unit.

When you turns on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/

OFF, the main zone is turned on.

■ Turning off this unit

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

• MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER

and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only

when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

• As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this

unit.

■ Turning on the main zone from the

standby mode

Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front

panel (or POWER on the remote control) to

turn on the main zone.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front

panel (or STANDBY on the remote control)

to set the main zone to the standby mode.

Turning on and off the power

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

MASTER ON/OFF

STANDBY

POWER

Notes

MASTER

Front panel

MASTER

Front panel

MAIN ZONE

ON/OFF

POWER

Front panel

Remote control

MAIN ZONE

ON/OFF

STANDBY

Front panel Remote control

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

AUTO SETUP

32 En

This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

Once you have connected the supplied optimizer

microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your

listening room, run “AUTO SETUP” in the OSD or in the

front panel display.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that

appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual

uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure and an

error or warning message appears in the OSD or in the front

panel display, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in

“TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 128 and 129 for a complete

list of error and warning messages and proper remedies.

• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.

• If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your

subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half

way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the

maximum.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

2 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be

when you are seated in your listening position. You can use a 6

mm diameter screw to fix the optimizer microphone to a tripod

(etc.).

AUTO SETUP

Using AUTO SETUP

Notes

(U.S.A. model)

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

3-13

4,14

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

(U.S.A. model)

Omni-directional

microphone

Optimizer microphone

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

33 En

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

3 Make sure of the following check points

before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.

• Speakers are connected appropriately.

• Supplied optimizer microphone is connected to this

unit and placed appropriately.

• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

• The room is sufficiently quiet.

• The video monitor connected to this unit is turned on.

4 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

5 Press ENTER to enter “AUTO SETUP”.

The “AUTO:MENU” display appears in the OSD.

6 Press l / h to select “SETUP”.

Choices: AUTO, RELOAD

• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO

SETUP” settings and override the previous

settings. When you select “RELOAD”, the

previous auto setup result appears in the OSD. See

step 7 on page 34 and carry out the operations.

“RELOAD” is available only when you have previously run

“AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.

7 Press k / n repeatedly to select “WIRING”,

“DISTANCE”, “SIZE”, “EQ”, or “LEVEL”.

This unit performs the following checks:

Speaker wiring WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the

polarity of each speaker.

Speaker distance DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the

listening position and adjusts the timing of each

channel.

Speaker size SIZE

Checks the frequency response of each speaker and

sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each

channel.

Choices: CHECK, SKIP

• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust

the item.

• Select “SKIP” to skip the item and perform no

adjustments.

Parametric equalizer level EQ

Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer

level of each channel to reduce coloration across the

channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is

particularly important if you use different brands or

sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room

with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the

frequency response of each channel is adjusted in

accordance with the sound output from your front

speakers.

Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT, SKIP

• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency

response of all speakers with higher frequencies

being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT

setting sounds a little harsh.

• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response

of all speakers. Recommended if all of your

speakers are of similar quality.

• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response

of each speaker in accordance with the sound of

your front speakers. Recommended if your front

speakers are of much higher quality than your other

speakers.

• Select “SKIP” to skip the selected item and

perform no adjustments.

Note

SRCH MODE

SET MENU



SET MENU

.;AUTOSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNALINFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SOURCE

AMP

AUTO:MENU

.SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

WIRING;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK

START

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Select

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

AUTO:MENU

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

.WIRING;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK

START

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Select

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

34 En

AUTO SETUP

Volume level LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

Choices: CHECK, SKIP

• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust

this item.

• Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no

adjustments.

8 Press n to select “START” and then press

ENTER to start the setup procedure.

This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test

tones are output from each speaker during the auto

setup procedure. Once all items are set, the

“RESULT:EXIT” display appears in the OSD.

• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in

the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes

for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.

The display changes as follows.

The results displayed under “RESULT” are as

follows.

Number of speakers SP

Displays the number of speakers connected to this

unit in the following order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

Speaker distance DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening

position in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Speaker level LVL

Displays the speaker output level in the following

order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output

level

• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing

procedure, restart from step 4.

• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are

output.

• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure,

the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen

appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on

page 36.

• When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the

number of warning messages appears in the above of

“RESULT” (see page 37).

• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR

PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK”

procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND

MENU” (see page 89) is automatically set to

“REVERSE”.

Notes

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

AUTO:MENU

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

WIRING;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK

. START

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

RESULT:EXIT

. RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft

. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

[

AUTO:CHECK

INITIALIZING

.PRE CHECK

MAIN CHECK

EQUALIZING

LEVEL

CHECK CH=CENTER

|||||;;;;;;;;

[]: Exit

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

35 En

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

9 Press ENTER to display the setup results in

detail.

10 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the

setup result displays.

If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see

page 84).

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of

your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to

recalibrate your system.

• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may

be longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer.

• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the

same band to provide finer adjustments.

RESULT:EXIT

. RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft

. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

[

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

[]/[]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

Notes

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

FRONT L;;14.0ft

CENTER;;;17.0ft

FRONT R;;15.0ft

PRNS L;;;17.0ft

PRNS R;;;17.0ft

RESULT:DISTANCE1

[]/[]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

FRONT L;;;;;;LRG

RESULT:SIZE

CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB

2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB

3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB

4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB

5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB

6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB

7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB

RESULT:EQ

[]/[]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

FRONT L;;;+1.0dB

CENTER;;;;-1.5dB

FRONT R;;;+6.5dB

PRNS L;;;;-9.0dB

PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB

RESULT:LEVEL1

[]/[]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[]/[]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[]/[]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker

distance from the

listening position

Results of the frequency

response of each speaker

Results of the parametric

equalizer of each speaker

Results of the speaker

output level

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

36 En

AUTO SETUP

11 Press ENTER to return to the top

“RESULT:EXIT” display.

12 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”

and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to

select “SET” or “CANCEL”.

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

13 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

14 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

• After you have completed the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, be

sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away

from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.

■ If an error screen appears

Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT”

and then press ENTER.

The following display is an example where “E-9:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD.

Choices: RETRY, EXIT

• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

Notes

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

RESULT:EXIT

. RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft

. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

[

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

RESULT:EXIT

RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft

. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

. SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

[

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH



SET MENU

.;AUTOSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNALINFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

ERROR

E-9:USER CANCEL

. Don't operate

any function.

. RETRY EXIT

[p]/[[]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

37 En

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

■ If “WARNING” appears

When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the

“RESULT:EXIT” display. Check the warning messages to

correct your speaker settings.

Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at

“WARNING” and then press ENTER to

display the detailed information about the

warning.

The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates

the number of warning messages.

2 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the

warning displays.

• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO

SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on

page 128.

• When the corresponding warning message is not

applicable to a speaker, “–

–” is displayed instead.

3 Press ENTER to return to the top

“RESULT:EXIT” display.

Note

RESULT:EXIT

. WARNING (3)

RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft

. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

[SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

WARNING: W-1

< OUT OF PHASE >

Reverse Channel

FL --

CENTER

PL PR

SL SR

SBL SBR

[]/[] : Select

[ENTER] : Enter

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

RESULT:EXIT

WARNING (3)

RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft

. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

. SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

PLAYBACK

38 En

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the

sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the

playback (see page 96).

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

• See page 42 to display the input source information.

• You can display a gray background in the OSD when there

is no video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK”

in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 97).

• You can change the display settings by using “SHORT

MESSAGE” parameter in “DISPLAY SET”. See pages 98

for details.

2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the operation mode selector to AMP

and then press one of the input selector

buttons on the remote control) to select the

desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for

a few seconds.

For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when

“XM” is selected as the input source, see page 65.

PLAYBACK

CAUTION

Basic procedure

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

452

AUX/DOCK

–

––

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

VOLUME

TV VOL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

(U.S.A. model)

Note

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

INPUT

SOURCE

AMP

Front panel

Remote control

CD-R

PHONO

ULTI

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

DTV

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DVR/VCR 2

V-AUX

INPUT: DVD

Currently selected input

source

Available input sources

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

39 En

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 54 for details about tuning instructions.

• See page 65 for details about XM Satellite Radio

tuning instructions.

4 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust

the volume to the desired output level.

See page 51 to adjust the level of each speaker.

5 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel (or press one of the sound field

program selector buttons on the remote

control repeatedly) to select the desired

sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display and in the OSD. See

page 45 for details about sound field programs.

Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer

mode cannot be selected when the component connected to

the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source

(see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG” (see page 40).

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last sound field program used with the

corresponding input source.

• To display information about the currently selected input

source in the OSD, see page 76 for details.

■ Guide to contents

VOLUME

–

VOLUME

Remote controlFront panel

PROGRAM

STEREO

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

Front panel

Remote control

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

Currently selected sound field program

Currently selected sound field program category

Note

When you want to...

See

page

Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 50

Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 50

Enjoy the compressed music sources in enhanced

sound

Edit parameters of sound field programs 76

Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at

night

Use headphones 41

Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 51

Select a decoder to play back sources with 80

Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 43

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

40 En

PLAYBACK

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (Audio input jack select) to switch the input jack

assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are

assigned to an input source.

• We recommend setting Audio input jack select to “AUTO” in

most cases.

• You can adjust the default Audio input jack select of this unit by

using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 99).

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the desired

input source.

2 Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or

AUDIO SEL on the remote control) repeatedly

to select the desired Audio input jack select

setting.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When

HDMI signals are not input, no sound

is output.

COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the

COAXIAL jack.

(2) Digital signals input at the

OPTICAL jack.

When no signals are input, no sound is

output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

This feature is not available when no digital input jack

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In

addition, HDMI is not available as an Audio input jack

select setting when the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks

are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT

MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 94).

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

INPUT

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

CD-R

PHONO

ULTI

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

DTV

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DVR/VCR 2

V-AUX

A.SEL: AUTO

AUDIO SEL

Currently selected

Audio input jack

select setting

Available input sources

SELECT

AUDIO

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

41 En

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 26) as the input

source.

Rotate the input selector on the front panel to

select MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the

remote control).

Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the

parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 96).

Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode

cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI

CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source and Audio input

jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40).

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

activates automatically (see page 49)

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks of this unit is selected as the input source and Audio input

jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40), only the signals

input at FRONT jacks are output from the connected

headphones.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the

audio output.

• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio

output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”

parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 93).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

Using your headphones

Notes

Muting the audio output

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

MUTE

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

42 En

PLAYBACK

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press SET MENU on the remote control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”

and then press ENTER.

The audio information about the input source appears

in the OSD.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to navigate the cursor

in the OSD and press l / h to toggle

between the audio and video information

displays.

4 Press SET MENU on the remote control again

to exit from “SET MENU”.

■ Audio information

Signal format FORMAT

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital

signal, it automatically switches to analog input.

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.

Sampling frequency SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from a

continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling

frequency.

Channel CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround

channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

“---” appears when there is no source channel available.

Bit rate BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per second.

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.

Dialogue normalization level DIALOG

The dialogue normalization level preset to the current

input Dolby Digital and DTS signal.

Flag FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically switch

decoders.

■ Video information

HDMI Signal Type HDMI SIGNAL

Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the

HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

HDMI Resolution HDMI RES.

Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the

HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

Analog Resolution ANALOG RES.

Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the

video jacks of this unit.

HDMI Error HDMI ERROR

Error message for HDMI sources or connected

HDMI devices. See page 127 for details.

Displaying the input source

information

SRCH MODE

SET MENU



SET MENU

.;AUTOSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNALINFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SOURCE

AMP

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Navigating the cursor Selecting the audio or

video information

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

43 En

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source and then an

audio source.

Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the

desired setting to select the default background video input source

of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 96).

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 29).

1 Press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control to select the desired input

source.

2 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

See page 54 for details about tuning instructions.

3 Press SLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching

the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep

timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front

panel display, and the display returns to the selected

sound field program.

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly

until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel

display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on

the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode.

Playing video sources in the

background of an audio source

Using the sleep timer

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min. SLEEP 90min.

SLEEP 60min.SLEEP 30min.SLEEP OFF

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min.

Flashes

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

Analog

Lights up

SLEEP

SLEEP OFF

Disappears

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

44 En

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

• When you set the “DECODER MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” to “AUTO”, this unit selects the appropriate digital decoder

according to the input signal.

• The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources.

• The YAMAHA HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from

the front, back, left and right.

• You can change sound field parameters. See page 76 for details.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input

source (see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40).

• When you play back DSD sources with any sound field program, this unit converts the DSD signals to PCM signals and then applies

the selected program.

• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the

DTS 96/24 decoder.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

■ Front panel operations

Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

■ Remote control operations

Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then

press one of the sound field program selector

buttons on the remote control repeatedly.

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

(U.S.A. model)

PROGRAM selector

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

Sound field program

selector buttons

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

45 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

BASIC

OPERATION

Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

■ For music audio sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 50), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49) or

surround decode mode (see page 80).

Sound field program descriptions

CLASSICAL Hall in Munich

This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively

little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna

A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which

produce a very full, rich sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

DIALG. LIFT

SB ROOM SIZES. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLYS.INIT. DLY

P.ROOM SIZE

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

P.INIT. DLY

DSP LEVEL

MOVIE

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive

cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and

DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.

Available sound field parameters (see page 77)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Created sound

fields

(see page 11)

CINEMA DSP

HiFi DSP

Category of the

program

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

CLASSICAL

Hall in Amsterdam

This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

CLASSICAL

Church in Freiburg

This program creates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early

reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

46 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

■ For various sources

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

CLASSICAL Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are

suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard

A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located at the corner of the room.

This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB Warehouse Loft

This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the

listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat

is at the center-left of the hall.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a

sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

Note

ENTERTAINMENT Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,

the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an

optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO OM S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

47 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

BASIC

OPERATION

■ For visual sources of music

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

■ For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 82 for details.

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

ENTERTAINMENT Action Game

This sound field has been optimized for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range

per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining

a clear sense of directions.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game

This sound field has been optimized for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field

design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in

the movie scenes in the game.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

Note

ENTERTAINMENT Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot

live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to

the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera”

offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of

presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent

beauty of music, The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

Note

ENTERTAIN

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE Standard

This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel

audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded

by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

DSP LEVEL

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

S. LIVENESS

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

SB LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

48 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

■ Stereo playback

MOVIE Spectacle

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making

both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or

DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO OM S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and

expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround,

Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO OM S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is

made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO OM S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear

words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO OM S IZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to

create sound depth using only the presence sound field.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV. LEVEL

REV.DELAY

DIALG.LIFT

STEREO 2ch STEREO

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 51 for details.

DIRECT

MOVIE

STEREO

STEREO 7ch STEREO

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2

channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,

etc.

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

STEREO

HiFi DSP

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

49 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

When you set “SUR. L/R SP”

to “NONE” (see page 88),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see

page 45).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 88) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when the Pure Direct (see page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see

page 51) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT”

mode (see page 49).

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or

HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 45). When

activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 41).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see

page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 51) is selected, or

when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49).

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

Press STRAIGHT on the front panel (or on the

remote control) to select “STRAIGHT”.

■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode

Press STRAIGHT on the remote control so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

Note

Notes

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources

Format Description

Dolby Digital

Standard processing for Dolby

Digital sources.

DTS

Standard processing for DTS

sources. When the input source is

DTS ES Discrete or DTS ES

Matrix format, the respective

indicator appears in the front

panel display.

DSD

Plays back DSD (Direct Stream

Digital) sources.

PCM

Plays back PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) sources.

MPCM

Plays back multi-channel PCM

(Pulse Code Modulation) sources.

Analog

Plays back analog sources.

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

USING AUDIO FEATURES

50 En

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound

of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is

activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the

least circuitry.

Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or on the

remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct

mode.

The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up

while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel

display automatically dims.

• When you play back the multi-channel PCM sources (less than

192 kHz), this unit downmixes the multi-channel signals

according to the “SPEAKER SET” in “BASIC MENU” (see

page 87).

• When the component connected to the HDMI IN jacks is

selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to

“AUTO” or “HDMI”, this unit does not turn off the video

circuitry in the Pure Direct mode.

• When you set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”, “HDMI” or

“COAX/OPT” (see page 40) and play back the Dolby Digital,

DTS or multi channel PCM sources, this unit activates the

corresponding decoder.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the Pure Direct mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker

level settings)

– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)

• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this

unit is turned off.

The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation

is performed.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front L/R, center, presence L/R speaker channels and

the subwoofer channel.

1 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS)

2 Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the

high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the

low-frequency response (BASS).

■ Bypassing the tone control circuitry

Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

BYPASS and cancel the tone control.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R,

center, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is

selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input

source.

USING AUDIO FEATURES

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

PURE DIRECT

Front panel

Remote control

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

CONTROL

TONE

PROGRAM

CONTROL

TONE

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

51 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 90).

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press LEVEL on the remote control

repeatedly to select the speaker you want to

adjust.

• Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can

also select the speaker by pressing k / n.

• Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR.

B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see

page 89).

2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust

the speaker output level.

• Press i to increase the value.

• Press j to decrease the value.

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels

and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.

1 Set the operation mode to AMP and then

press STEREO on the remote control

repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.

• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 87).

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the

PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

2 Press PARAMETER and then l / h to set the

“DIRECT” parameter.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP

processors and the tone control circuitry only when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see

page 50).

• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP

processors and the tone control circuitry when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are

input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from

the front left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and

right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the

following cases:

–“LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87).

–“FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and

“LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 87).

• Press PARAMETER again to exit from the parameter

setting mode.

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SB L

Surround back right speaker

SB R

Surround back left speaker

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

TITLE

BAND

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

2-channel stereo

STEREO

2ch Stereo

SOURCE

AMP

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

52 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are

created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is

resampled to lower the bit rate and to remove sounds that

are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The

Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances

your listening experience by regenerating the missing

harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened

complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as

well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass

is compensated, providing improved performance of the

overall sound system.

• When you play back DSD sources or PCM sources whose

sampling frequencies are higher than 48 kHz, this unit samples

them down to 48 kHz or lower and applies the Compressed

Music Enhancer mode.

• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with

any of the sound field programs.

Press ENHANCER on the front panel (or set the

operation mode selector to AMP and then press

ENHANCER on the remote control) repeatedly to

select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer

mode.

The following display is shown in the OSD and the

ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display.

Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 7ch Enhancer, Off

• Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression

artifacts in 2-channel stereo.

• Select “7ch Enhancer” to play back compression

artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

• Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode.

When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously

selected sound field program.

■ Changing the parameter of the

Compressed Music Enhancer mode

Press PARAMETER and then l / h on the

remote control to select the desired effect level.

The following display is shown in the OSD.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

Press PARAMETER to turn off the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode parameter display.

Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the

characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of

some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set

the effect level to “LOW”.

Selecting the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode

Notes

ENT

ENHANCER

MUSICENHANCER

2chEnhancer

ENHANCER

SOURCE

AMP

ENHANCER

Lights up

Note

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

MUSIC ENHANCER

2ch Stereo

. LOW [HIGH

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

53 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on

the type of material you are playing.

1 Press NIGHT on the front panel (or set the

operation mode selector to AMP and then

press NIGHT on the remote control)

repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC”.

Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF

• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust

the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front

panel display.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are

stored independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following

cases:

–when the Pure Direct mode (see page 50) is selected.

–when the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see

page 41).

–when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness

depending on the input source and surround sound settings

you use.

Selecting the night listening mode

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

NIGHT

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Effect.Lvl:MID

Remote control

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

FM/AM TUNING

54 En

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of

the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset

stations with each other.

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

■ Front panel functions

1 INPUT selector

Selects “TUNER” as the input source.

2 A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) (see

page 57).

3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)

when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel

display (see page 57).

• Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not

displayed in the front panel display (see page 56).

4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT

• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH

between selecting preset station numbers and selecting

the tuning frequency.

• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 58).

5 FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see

page 55).

6 MEMORY

Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this

button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset

tuning (see page 57).

7 TUNING MODE

Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator

is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is

turned off) (see page 55).

■ Remote control functions

1 TUNER

Selects “TUNER” as the input source. This unit is turned

into the last selected station.

2 BAND

Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see

page 55). This unit is turned into the last selected AM or

FM station.

3 PRESET/CH k / n

Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when

the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (on

page 58).

4 Numeric buttons

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations (see

page 59).

5 A-E/CAT. l / h, A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see

page 57).

FM/AM TUNING

Note

FM/AM controls and functions

INPUT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

75432 6

(U.S.A. model)

TUNER

CD-R

DTV

PHONO

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

VCR 1

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR/VCR 2

POWER

STANDBY

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

NUMBER

CAT.

ALL

PRESET

DISPLAY

MUTE

ENT

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

(U.S.A. model)

Set to

SOURCE

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

55 En

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to

begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.

•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.

Automatic tuning

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUN

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

4 3231

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

FM AM

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

AUTO

AFM88.9MHz

Lights upNo colon (:)

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

TUNING

PRESET/

TUNED

AFM88.9MHz

PRESET/TUNING/CH

Lights up

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

56 En

FM/AM TUNING

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO

indicator disappears from the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune

into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

Manual tuning

Note

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

ING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

4 3231

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

FM AM

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

AFM88.9MHz

No colon (:)

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

NING

PRESET/

PRESET/TUNING/CH

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

57 En

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in

order. You can then recall any preset station easily by

selecting the preset station number.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception

band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3

to select the preset station number under which the first

station will be stored.

• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store

FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING so

that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display

and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing

and holding MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

searching for all the available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station

you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it

manually and store it as described in “Manual preset

tuning” on page 58.

Automatic preset tuning

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNIN

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

321

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

Notes

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM88.9MHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

58 En

FM/AM TUNING

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.

See pages 55 and 56 for tuning instructions.

2 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

•Press h to select a higher preset station number.

•Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

Manual preset tuning

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNIN

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

4 2,53

(U.S.A. model)

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

MEMORY

A :FM88.9MHz

Preset station

group

Flashe

Colon (:)

Notes

PRESET/TUNING/CH

MEMORY

A1:FM88.9MHz

Preset station number

Flashes

A1:FM88.9MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

59 En

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, set the

operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER to

select “TUNER” as the input source.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or set the

operation mode selector to SOURCE and

then press A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) to select the desired preset station

group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) to select the desired preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

Selecting preset stations

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

(U.S.A. model)

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

1,2

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE

AMP

Front panel

Remote control

PRESET/TUNING/CH

A1:FM88.9MHz

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

60 En

FM/AM TUNING

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59.

2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59.

4 Press EDIT again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

Exchanging preset stations

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNIN

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

3 2,43

(U.S.A. model)

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

NING

PRESET/

MEMORY

E1:FM88.9MHz

FlashesFlashes

MEMORY

A5:FM88.9MHz

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING/CH

Flashes

EDIT E1-A5

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

NING

PRESET/

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

61 En

BASIC

OPERATION

XM Satellite Radio is a satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada,

broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to

coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33

channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the

traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide.

Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM

using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on

page 63. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).

This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround

sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.

• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48

contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii)

and Canada.

• XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold

separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)

or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).

• For information on obtaining the XM Passport System, visit the

XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)

or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or

consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products.

• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors.

■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM

Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive

XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other

fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may

apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and

programming subject to change. Channels with frequent

explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel

blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1-

800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the

United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)”

(for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to

Customer Agreement available at “http://

www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or

“http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM

service only available in the 48 continuous United States

and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite

reserved.

Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold

separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.

For details, see the operating instructions provided with

XM Passport System.

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

Notes

Connecting the XM Passport System

XM Passport and

XM Passport Home Dock

(sold separately)

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

62 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or

set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source.

■ Front panel functions

1 INPUT selector

Selects “XM” as the input source.

2 CATEGORY

(All Channel Search mode)

Changes the channel category while staying in the All

Channel Search mode.

(Category Search mode)

Changes the channel category.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel group (A to E).

3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold

for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press

and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).

4 SEARCH MODE

Changes the search mode between the All Channel

Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes

(see page 66).

5 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70).

6 DISPLAY

Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as

channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or

song title displayed in the front panel display or in the

OSD (see page 71).

■ Remote control functions

1 XM

Selects “XM” as the input source.

2 PRESET/CH k / n

(All Channel Search mode)

Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold

for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press

and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).

3 XM MEMORY

Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70).

4 Numeric buttons

(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)

Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.

(Preset Search mode)

Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.

5 Operation mode selector

Set to SOURCE when you operate the XM Satellite Radio

tuning function.

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions

Note

INPUT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

6432 5

(U.S.A. model)

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

CD-R

DTV

PHONO

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

VCR 1

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR/VCR 2

POWER

STANDBY

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

NUMBER

CAT.

ALL

PRESET

DISPLAY

MUTE

ENT

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

63 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

6 SRCH MODE

Changes the search mode between the All Channel

Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes

(see page 66).

7 A-E/CAT. l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Changes the channel category.

(Category Search mode)

Changes the channel category.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel group (A to E).

8 DISPLAY

Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as

channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or

song title displayed in the front panel display or in the

OSD (see page 71).

9 ENT

Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct

Number Access mode (see page 69).

0 ALL

Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 66).

A NUMBER

Press and hold before you press the input selector or

numeric buttons to switch the function to entering

numbers.

B PRESET

Selects the Preset Search Mode (see page 68).

C CAT.

Selects the Category Search mode (see page 67).

To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio

service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.

Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and

then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit

card handy for signing up.

For residents in the United States

URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/

Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)

For residents in Canada

URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/

activation.jsp

Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)

Activating XM Satellite Radio

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 63 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

64 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

2 Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level

and adjust the orientation of XM Passport

System for a better percentage of the

reception level.

You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by

using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION

MENU” (see page 100).

• If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel

display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the

XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See

“Connecting the XM Passport System” on page 61 and

check the connection.

• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU”

(see page 100) cannot be adjusted by using the remote

control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM

Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for

a better percentage of the reception level.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) to select channel “0”.

You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search

mode (see page 66) is not selected.

4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number

displayed in the front panel display and write

it down.

ID:_____________________________________

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

NING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

CD-R

PHONO

ULTI

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

DTV

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DVR/VCR 2

V-AUX

SOURCE

AMP

Front panel

Lights up

Remote control

Notes

Note

PRESET/TUNING/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Remote controlFront panel

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 64 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

65 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 66.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 67.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 68.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct Number Access

mode” on page 69.

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the

surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts

in multi-channels (see page 80).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 70).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71).

Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

AUX/DOCK

–

––

VOLUME

TV VOL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

UNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT selector

XM button

Set to

SOURCE

Note

INPUT

CD-R

PHONO

ULTI

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

DTV

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DVR/VCR 2

V-AUX

[001] Preview

SOURCE

AMP

Lights up

Remote control

Front panel

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 65 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

66 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or

SRCH MODE on the remote control)

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”.

2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) repeatedly to search for a

channel within all channels.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel

(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNI

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

2 3 1

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

RETURN

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

2,3

(U.S.A. model)

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

TUNIN

PRESET/

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

ALL CH SEARCH

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/TUNING/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 66 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

67 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Category Search mode

1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or

SRCH MODE on the remote control)

repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) repeatedly to search for a

channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel

(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

NING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

2 3 1

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

RETURN

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

2,3

(U.S.A. model)

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

NING

PRESET/

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

CAT SEARCH

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/TUNING/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 67 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

68 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset

channels” on page 70.

The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is

“[001] Preview”.

1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or

SRCH MODE on the remote control)

repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”.

2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) repeatedly to change the

preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

ING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

2 3 1

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

RETURN

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

2,3

(U.S.A. model)

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

TUNIN

PRESET/

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

PRESET SEARCH

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/TUNING/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 68 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

69 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons on the remote

control to enter the desired three-digit

channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons on the remote control and then press ENT

to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit

confirms the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter

a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically

confirms the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

ENT

RETURN

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

(U.S.A. model)

ALL CH SEARCH

CAT SEARCH

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

Remote control

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

<XM> --1

<XM> -12

<XM>123

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 69 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

70 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 68.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on

page 65 for details.

2 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM

MEMORY on the remote control).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)

repeatedly to select a preset channel group

(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The preset channel group letter appears in the front

panel display.

Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

NING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

4 2,53

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

RETURN

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

3,4

2,5

(U.S.A. model)

[043] XMU

Currently selected channel number

Note

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

Flashes

Front panel Remote control

MEMORY

C [043] XMU

Currently selected preset channel group

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

Flashes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 70 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

71 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) repeatedly to select a preset

channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM

MEMORY on the remote control) to set the

selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a

preset channel while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously

stored in the same preset channel group and number is

cleared.

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display or in the OSD.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and

Canada models only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on

page 122 for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the

remote control repeatedly to toggle between the

following XM Satellite Radio information display

modes.

Note

MEMORY

C5 [043] XMU

Currently selected preset channel number

PRESET/TUNING/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

Flashes

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

Front panel

Remote control

C5: [043] XMU

Colon (:)

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

NING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

(U.S.A. model)

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

RETURN

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

Channel number / name

Channel category

Artist name / Song title

Front panel

Remote control

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 71 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

72 En

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

When the channel number / name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name / song title is displayed:

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 98).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information

display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the

XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as

described above.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on

the remote control).

• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “ON

SCREEN” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the

OSD.

• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released

if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you

change the XM Satellite Radio channel.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information

screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM

Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote

control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio

information screen is being hold.

Note

[043] XMU

<CAT>Rock

Coldplay / Spe

XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM :043

CHAN :XMU

CAT :Rock

NAME :Coldplay

TITLE :Speed of sound

.( Coldplay / Spe )

[]/[]:CHANNEL

[p]/[[]:CATEGORY

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

Remote controlFront panel

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 72 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

USING IPOD

73 En

BASIC

OPERATION

Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected

to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 27), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.

You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression

artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 52).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other

components” on page 102.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 128.

• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges

the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHRG” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (on page 100).

• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 10) appears in the

front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as

the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done

with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)

or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD

of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in

the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”

parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). You can

also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.

Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to

suit your personal preferences.

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your

iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in

the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between

the “Settings” parameter settings.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your

iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.

USING iPod

Notes

Controlling iPod

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 73 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

74 En

USING iPod

1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE

and then press DISPLAY on the remote

control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to

navigate the iPod menu and then press

ENTER to begin playback of the selected

song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),

Albums (albums), Songs (songs),

Genres (genres), Composers (composers),

Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears

in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ”

appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of

songs are being repeated.

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

iPod Top

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

SOURCE

AMP

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Note

1 All

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 74 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

RECORDING

75 En

BASIC

OPERATION

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in

noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs

(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 50), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 90) and the sound field programs (see

page 45) do not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,

analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is

connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the source

component you want to record from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

RECORDING

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

CAUTION

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

Front panel Remote control

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 75 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

76 En

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see

page 98). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,

set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press PARAMETER on the remote

control.

The following display is shown in the OSD.

3 Press one of the sound field program

selector buttons repeatedly to select the

desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press k / n to select the desired sound field

parameter and then l / h to change the

selected sound field parameter value.

•Press h to increase the value.

•Press l to decrease the value.

• For details about the function and control range of each sound

field parameter, see page 77.

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

sound field parameter name in the OSD.

• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field

program parameter settings.

• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field

programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.

In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages.

• If you press and hold l / h to change the sound field

parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown

momentarily in the front panel display.

• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to

initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a

sound field program group (see page 99).

• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,

press n repeatedly to select “PARAM. INIT” and then press h

repeatedly.

5 Press PARAMETER to turn off the sound field

parameter display.

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Note

(U.S.A. model)

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

2,5

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

MOVIE

.<PROLOGIC>

DSPLEVEL;;;+0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;16ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;16ms

Sci-fi

Sound field program category

Sound field parameters Sound field parameter

values

Cursor

SOURCE

AMP

STEREO

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 76 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

77 En

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 76 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

DSP LEVEL

DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on

the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level

relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INI.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance

from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The

larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set

to a large value.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 77 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

78 En

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the

surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the

sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter

from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the

hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound

source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which

has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as

“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets

you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Sound field parameter Features

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 78 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

79 En

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REV.TIME

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening

room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

REV.DELAY

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

REV.LEVEL

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Reverberation

Source sound

REV.TIME

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIMEREV.DELAY

Time

60 dB

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 79 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

80 En

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press SUR. DECODE on the remote

control to select the surround decode mode.

2 Press SELECT on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending

on the type of source you are playing and your

personal preference.

• You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT

and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.

• You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press

PARAMETER and then k / n repeatedly on the remote

control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can

change the value of the selected parameter by pressing

l / h repeatedly on the remote control.

DIALG.LIFT

Dialog lift. Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the

front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher

the position of the front and center channel sound.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

2ch Stereo

DIRECT

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo

sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only

when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 50).

• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2

channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the

subwoofer in the following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”

(see page 87).

7ch Stereo

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right

levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Selecting decoders

SUR. DECODE

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 80 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

81 En

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Decoder descriptions

When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND

DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.

SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Movie

PL II Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”

is set to “NONE” (see page 89).

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Music

PL II Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”

is set to “NONE” (see page 89).

PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Game

PL II Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”

is set to “NONE” (see page 89).

CENTER WIDTHDIMENSION

PLIIMusic

PLIIxMusic

SURROUND DECODE

PANORAMA

SUR.DECODE

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not

available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89).

Available sound field parameters (see page 77)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Category of the

program

SUR.DECODE

SURROUND DECODE Neo: 6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

SUR.DECODE

SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

C. IMAGE

SURROUND DECODE

neural sur.

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Neural Surround processing for any sources.

The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2-

channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-

incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of

XM Satellite Radio.

SUR.DECODE

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 81 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

82 En

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

Decoder parameter descriptions

■ Selecting decoders used with sound

field programs

Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with

MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).

See page 47 for details about MOVIE sound field

program.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press MOVIE on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired MOVIE

sound field programs.

2 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the

desired decoder used with the selected

sound field program.

You can select from the following decoders

depending on the type of source you are playing and

your personal preference.

You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and

then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.

Available decoders

Decoder parameter Features

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

PANORAMA

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as

well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

DIMENSION

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front

or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

CENTER WIDTH

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

DTS Neo:6 Music

C.IMAGE

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

Initial setting: 0.3

MOVIE

SOURCE

AMP

Decoder Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for

any sources

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby

Pro Logic II) processing for

movie sources.

The Pro Logic IIx

decoder is not available when “SB

L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see

page 89).

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie

sources

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 82 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

83 En

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel

sources

If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX

or DTS-ES decoders.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control

repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-

channel playback.

2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder

while the name of the decoder is displayed.

Auto AUTO

When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is

input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back

the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.

If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present

in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in

6.1/7.1 channels.

Decoders

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the format of the source you are playing.

Off OFF

Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.

• “PLIIx Movie” is available only when “SB L/R SP” (see

page 89) is set to “SMLx2” or “LRGx2”.

• Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag

that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing

these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder

manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press

EXTD SUR. in the following cases:

– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88) or “SB L/R SP” (see

page 89) is set to “NONE”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 51) or Pure Direct (see

page 50) mode is selected.

• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to

“AUTO”.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89).

EXTD SUR.

SOURCE

AMP

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Decoder Functions

PLIIxMovie

q D+PLIIx Movie

DTS+PLIIx Movie

MPCM+PLIIx Movie

DSD+PLIIx Movie

Plays back multi-channel

sources in 7.1 channels using

the Pro Logic IIx movie

decoder.

PLIIxMusic

q D+PLIIx Music

DTS+PLIIx Music

MPCM+PLIIx Music

DSD+PLIIx Music

Plays back multi-channel

sources in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the Pro Logic IIx music

decoder.

DTS ES

DTS 96/24 ES

Plays back DTS signals in 6.1/

7.1 channels using the DTS-ES

decoder.

DOLBY D EX

DTS+DOLBY EX

MPCM+DOLBY EX

DSD+DOLBY EX

Plays back multi-channel

sources in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital EX

decoder.

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 83 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

84 En

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP

Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust basic system parameters.

Sound menu 2 SOUND MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

Parameter Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the

crossover frequency.

B)SP LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SPEAKER LEVEL and SP

DISTANCE setting.

Parameter Features Page

A)EQUALIZER

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

B)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

D)AUDIO SET

Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.

E)HDMI SET

Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 84 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

85 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Input menu 3 INPUT MENU

Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.

Option menu 4 OPTION MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.

The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models.

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 42).

Parameter Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source.

C)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear

panel of this unit.

E)MULTI CH SET

Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer, and surround channels

when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

Parameter Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.

C)AUDIO SELECT

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode

selected in INPUT MENU.

E)PARAM.INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

F)ZONE SET

Adjusts the Zone 2 and Zone 3 parameters.

G)XM RADIO SET

Displays the current reception level of XM Passport System.

100

H)DOCK SET

Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in

the standby mode.

100

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 85 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

86 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

• If you press PARAMETER during the “SET MENU” operation,

the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.

• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each

parameter setting.

• Press RETURN or l to return to the previous menu level.

You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night

listening mode (see page 53).

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.

3 Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

You can also press h to enter the selected menu item.

4 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER

to select and enter the desired menu.

The following displays are examples where “SOUND

MENU” is selected.

Using SET MENU

Note

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

2-6

1,7

(U.S.A. model)

SRCH MODE

SET MENU



SET MENU

.;AUTOSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNALINFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SOURCE

AMP



SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

. ;MANUAL SETUP

. ;SIGNAL INFO

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

;MANUAL SETUP

.1BASICMENU

2SOUNDMENU

3INPUTMENU

4OPTIONMENU

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

. A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)AUDIO SET



2 SOUND

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. E)HDMI SET



2 SOUND

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 86 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

87 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

5 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER

to select and enter the desired submenu.

The following display is an example where “LFE

LEVEL” is selected.

6 Press k / n to select the desired parameter

and then l / h to change the parameter

settings.

• Press h to increase the value.

• Press l to decrease the value.

7 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings.

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.

• If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

• When the diameter of the woofer section of the speaker unit is

larger than 16 cm (6.5 in), set the correspondent speaker setting

parameter to “LARGE” (or “LRG”).

LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH

• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a

subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-

frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.

• Select “FRONT” (front) if you did not connect a

subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals

of the front left and right channels, and the low-

frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right

speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see

page 87).

• Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.

The low-frequency signals of any source are output

from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the

low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”

(or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-

frequency signals of the front left and right channels

are directed to the front left and right speakers and the

subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see

page 87).

.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

B)LFE

LEVEL

[

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

1 BASIC MENU

. A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)TESTTONE



2 BASIC

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SWFRFRONTBOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 87 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

88 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

• Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front

speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left

and right channels are directed to the speakers selected

in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87).

• Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front

speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. All the front left and right channel signals

are directed to the front left and right speakers.

• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), the

LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-

frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the

low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers

regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting.

• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), you

can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of

“FRONT SP” is set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this

unit change the value to “LARGE” automatically.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center

speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the

front left and right speakers.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center

speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/

BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker

that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All

the center channel signals are directed to the center

speaker.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround

speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 49) and “SUR. B L/R SP” is

automatically set to “NONE”.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left

and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the

surround left and right channels are directed to the

speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left

and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are

directed to the surround left and right speakers.

Notes

  SMALLLARGE

FRONT SP

[

NONESMLLRG

CENTER SP

[

NONESMLLRG

SUR. L/R SP

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 88 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

89 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Surround back speakers SB L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround

back speakers. The surround back channel signals are

directed to the surround left and right speakers.

• Select “SMLx1” (small x 1) if you have a small

surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-

frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency

signals of the surround back left and right channels are

directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”

and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround

back left speaker.

• Select “SMLx2” (small x 2) if you have two small

surround back speakers that do not reproduce low-

frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency

signals of the surround back left and right channels are

directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRGx1” (large x 1) if you have a large

surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency

signals effectively. All the surround back left and right

channel signals are directed to the surround back left

speaker.

• Select “LRGx2” (large x 2) if you have two large

surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. All the surround back left and right

channel signals are directed to the surround back left

and right speakers.

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers

connected to this unit.

Choices: NONE, YES

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence

speakers.

• Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers

and want to use them.

Bass cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89). All frequencies

below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer

or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

Presence/Surround back channel priority

PRIORITY

Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the

surround back speakers when playing sources that contain

surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP

sound field programs.

Choices: PRNS, SB

• Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from the

surround speakers.

• Select “SB” to use the surround back speakers when

surround back channel signals are detected in a

CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals

are output from the front speakers.

SMLx1 SMLx2

SB L/R SP

[

NONEYES

PRESENCE SP

[

FREQ;;;80Hz

CROSS OVER

NORMALREVERSE

02ASUBWOOFER PHASE

[

PRNS SB

PRIORITY

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 89 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

90 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87).

Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting:

FR. L/FR. R/SWFR/PR. L/PR. R: 0 dB

CENT./SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB

• Select “FR. L” to adjust the balance of the front left

speaker.

• Select “FR. R” to adjust the balance of the front right

speaker.

• Select “CENT.” to adjust the balance of the center

speaker.

• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the balance of the surround

left speaker.

• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the balance of the surround

right speaker.

• Select “SB L” to adjust the balance of the surround

back left speaker.

• Select “SB R” to adjust the balance of the surround

back right speaker.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.

• Select “PR. L” to adjust the balance of the presence left

speaker.

• Select “PR. R” to adjust the balance of the presence

right speaker.

• “CENT.”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”,

“PR. L” and “PR. R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see

page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SB.L/R SP” (see

page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and “PRESENCE

SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE” respectively.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SB.L/R

SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89).

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting:

FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/

PRNS R: 3.00m (10.0ft)

CENTER: 2.60m (8.5ft)

SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40m (8.0ft)

• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front

left speaker.

• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front

right speaker.

• Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center

speaker.

• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround

left speaker.

• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround

right speaker.

• Select “SB L” to adjust the distance of the surround

back left speaker.

• Select “SB R” to adjust the distance of the surround

back right speaker.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.

• Select “PRNS L” to adjust the distance of the presence

left speaker.

• Select “PRNS R” to adjust the distance of the presence

right speaker.

Notes



.FR.L;;;;;;;;;;

FR.R;;;;;;;;;;

CENT.;;;;;;;;;;

B)SP

LEVEL

-__________+

[]/[]:Up/Down

[p]/[[]:Adjust

. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet

FRONTL;;;10.0ft

FRONTR;;;10.0ft

CENTER;;;;8.5ft

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

C)SP

DISTANCE

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 90 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

91 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• “CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”,

“PRNS L” and “PRNS R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP”

(see page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SUR. B L/R SP”

(see page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and

“PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE”

respectively.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/

R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89).

■ Test tone D)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER

SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings.

Choices: ON, OFF

If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s

length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening

position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,

calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

• This function is automatically turned off if you exit “BASIC

MENU”.

• If you select “ON” and enter the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP

LEVEL” or “SP DISTANCE” menu, the test tone is output from

the selected speakers.

Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors

or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are

set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see

page 32).

■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the

graphic equalizer.

Equalizer select SELECT

Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.

Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF

• Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer

adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32).

• Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-frequency band

graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the

speaker matches. Press ENTER to display the graphic

equalizer screen.

• Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature.

You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO

SETUP” in advance (see page 32). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is

automatically selected as the default setting.

Notes

[]/[]:Select

TEST TONE;;;;OFF

D)TEST TONE

)

2 SOUND MENU

Note

. A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)AUDIO SET



2 SOUND

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. E)HDMI SET



2 SOUND

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SELECT;;;;;;;GEQ

A)EQUALIZER

[]/[]:Adjust

[ENTER]:Enter

)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 91 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

92 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

Graphic equalizer GEQ

Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R

and surround back L/R, surround back, presence L/R

speakers and the subwoofer with that of the front L/R

speakers. You can adjust 7 frequency bands (63Hz,

160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz).

Choices: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust the

selected frequency band.

The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is

selected in “SELECT”.

Test tone TEST TONE

Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while

listening to a test tone. To select “TEST TONE”, press n

repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently

selected source component.

• Select “ON” to output test tones from the selected

speakers.

■ Low-frequency effect level

B)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speaker SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack.

■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Choices: MIN, STD, MAX

• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low

volume levels.

• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.

• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest

amount of dynamic range.

Speaker SP

Adjusts the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Adjusts the headphone compression.

Note

.CHANNEL;;FRONTL



63Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB

160Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB

400Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB



[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

A)EQUALIZER

-______+

CHANNEL;;FRONTL



16kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB



. TESTTONE;;;;OFF

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

A)EQUALIZER

-______+

Note

.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

B)LFE

LEVEL

[

.SP:MINSTDMAX

HP:MINSTDMAX

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Select

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 92 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

93 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Audio settings D)AUDIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this

unit.

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 41).

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio

output.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay AUDIO DELAY

Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize

it with the video image. This may be necessary when

using certain LCD monitors or projectors.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use this feature to select whether the audio output

bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and

“BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 50).

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” if you want the signals to bypass the

tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal

possible.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want the signals to bypass

the tone control circuitry.

■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET

Use this feature to select the component to play back

HDMI audio signals.

Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO

Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the

HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Choices: RX-V1700, OTHER

• Select “RX-V1700” to play back HDMI audio signals

on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the

HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

• Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this

unit.

. MUTE TYPE;;;FULL

A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms

TONE BYPASS;AUTO

LE>E

D)AUDIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

Note

[]/[]:Adjust

SUPPORT AUDIO:

RX-V1700

E)HDMI SET

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 93 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

94 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the

input mode or rename the input source.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on

the remote control).

The input source name in parentheses indicates the default

assigned input source.

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C

CMPNT-V IN

Choices: [A] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,

DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX

[B] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,

DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX

[C] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,

DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX

For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1, 2 and 3

COAXIAL IN

Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

V-AU X, MULT I C H

(2) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

V-AU X, MULT I C H

(3) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

V-AU X, MULT I C H

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 4, 5, 6 and 7

OPTICAL IN

Choices: (4) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

MULTI CH

(5) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

MULTI CH

(6) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

MULTI CH

(7) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

MULTI CH

3 INPUT MENU

. E)MULTI CH SET

3 INPUT

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT RENAME

C)VOLUME TRIM

D)DECODER MODE

3 INPUT

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

.[A];;;;;DVD

(DVD)

[B];;;;;DTV

(DTV)

[C];;;;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)



CMPNT-V



INPUT

.(1);;;;; CD

(CD)

 (2);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(3);;;;;DVR/VCR2

(DVR/VCR2)



COAXIAL



.(4);;;;;CD

(CD)

(5);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(6);;;;;DTV

(DTV)



OPTICAL



IN1/2

.(7);;;;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)



OPTICAL



IN2/2

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 94 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

95 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks 8 and 9

OPTICAL OUT

Choices: (8) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

V-AU X

(9) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,

DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

V-AU X

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority

is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) jack.

For HDMI IN jacks 1and 2 HDMI IN

Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,

DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX

[IN2] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,

DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX

■ Input rename B) INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

• This feature is useful when you change the input or output

assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.

• You can also change the name of the input source that appears

in the display window on the remote control. Refer to

“Changing source names in the display window” on page 106”.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control to select the input source

you want to change the name of.

2 Press l / h on the remote control to place

the “_” (underscore) under the space or the

character you want to edit.

3 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and then press l / h to move to the

next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

•Press n to change the character in the following order, or

press k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each

input source.

5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to

exit from “INPUT RENAME”.

Notes

.(8);;;;;MD/TAPE

(MD/TAPE )

(9);;;;;;;CD-R

(CD-R)



OPTICAL



OUT

.[IN1];;; DVD

( DVD )

[IN2];;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)

HDMI IN

DVD-> DVD

[p]/[[]:Position

[]/[]:Chara.



C)INPUT



RENAME

________

Notes

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 95 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

96 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: XM, TUNER, PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE,

DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT

jacks.

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the

reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals

(DTS, etc.).

Choices: AUTO, DTS

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the

input mode.

■ Multi channel input Setup

E)MULTI CH SET

Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center,

subwoofer and surround channels when a source

component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder,

use this feature to select jacks for the additional front

signals.

BGV BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR, DVR/VCR 2,

V-AU X, LAST, OFF

• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select

the last selected video source as the background video

source.

• Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video

source in the background.

Input channels INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6CH, 8CH

• Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals.

• Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals.

If “ZONE2 AMP” is set to “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” or “BOTH” (see

page 100), no sound is output from the surround back speakers

even if you select “8CH”. In this case, select “6CH” and set the

output setting of the external component to 6 channels.

Front input FRONT

If you selected 8ch in “INPUT CH”, you can select the

analog jacks at which the front signals from an external

decoder will be input.

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT,

VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to

“8CH”.

XM;;;0.0dB

TUNER;;;0.0dB

PHONO;;;0.0dB

CD;;;0.0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust



C)VOLUME TRIM

[

D)DECODER MODE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

. CD ;;;;AUTO

DVD ;;;;AUTO

DTV ;;;;AUTO

CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO

[

Note

. BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUTCH;;;;;6CH

E)MULTI CH SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

[

BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUTCH;;;;;8CH

.FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD

E)MULTI CH SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 96 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

97 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Use the “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the

parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (except “DIMMER”, “SHORT

MESSAGE”, “ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL”) to the factory

presets (see page 119).

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: – 4 to 0

Control step: 1

•Press l to make the front panel display dimmer.

•Press h to make the front panel display brighter.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

•Press l to raise the position of the OSD.

•Press h to lower the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Use this feature to display a gray background in your

video monitor when there is no video signal being input.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in your

video monitor when there is no video signal being

input.

• Select “OFF” not to display a gray background in your

video monitor.

• Depending on the video signals being input or the system

setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be

displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to

“OFF”.

• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not

be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the

picture.

Video conversion V CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and

component video signals interchangeably and up-

convert composite and S-video and component video

signals to HDMI video signals.

• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i

(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite

video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted to component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Set “V CONV.” to “ON” to display the sound field parameter

display and short message display.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “V CONV.” to “OFF”.

• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a

game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals

even if you set “V CONV.” to “ON”.

4 OPTION MENU

Note

. A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORY GUARD

C)AUDIO SELECT

D)DECODER MODE

OPTION

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. E)PARAM. INI

F)ZONE SET

G)XM RADIO SET

H)DOCKSET

OPTION

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;0

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;0

GRAY BACK;;;;AUTO

VCONV.;;;;;;;;ON



[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust



A)DISPLAY



SET

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 97 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

98 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

Component interlace/progressive up-conversion

CMPNT I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog

interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite video, S-video and

component video jacks so that the analog video signals

deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to activate the analog interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

• Select “OFF” to deactivate the analog interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the

OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”.

• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals

with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be

displayed on your video monitor when “CMPNT I/P” is set to

“ON”. Use “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the

“CMPNT I/P” parameter to the factory preset setting (see

page 119).

HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion

HDMI I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI

interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite video, S-video and

component video jacks so that the analog video signals

deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

are output at the HDMI OUT jack.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to activate the HDMI interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

• Select “OFF” to deactivate the HDMI interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the

OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”.

• When analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are

up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the

picture quality may worsen.

Short message display

SHORT MESSAGE

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message

display function.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to activate the short message display

function. The contents of the front panel display appear

at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this

unit.

• Select “OFF” to deactivate the short message display

function.

The short message display does not appear in the following cases:

– when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p,

1080i or 1080p resolutions are input

– When HDMI video signals are input

On-screen display time ON SCREEN

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

XM Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD

after you perform a certain operation.

Choices: ALWAYS, 10SEC, 30SEC

• Select “ALWAYS” to display the OSD unceasingly

during an operation.

• Select “10SEC” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after

you perform a certain operation.

• Select “30SEC” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after

you perform a certain operation.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set whether to display the information

(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel

display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once

when “XM” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source.

Choices: CONT, ONCE

• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”

feature.

• Select “ON” to protect:

– DSP sound field program parameters

– all “SET MENU” items

– all speaker levels

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select

and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.

Notes

Note

OFFON

[]/[]:Adjust



B)MEMORY



GUARD

[

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 98 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

99 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the

input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate input mode.

• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last input mode used for the connected input

source.

Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD

SUR. button on the remote control.

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for

the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to

automatically detect the type of input signals and select

the appropriate decoder mode.

• Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder mode used the connected input

source.

Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD

SUR. button on the remote control.

■ Parameter initialization E)PARAM.INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

factory settings.

Press the corresponding sound field program selector

buttons on the remote control to select the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field

program names that have been changed from their initial

factory settings.

Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,

ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,

SURROUND DECODE

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when

“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 98).

■ Zone set F)ZONE SET

Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL

Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT

jacks.

Choices: VAR, FIX

• Select “VAR” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or

ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with

VOLUME +/– on the remote control.

• Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3

OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level.

Note

[AUTO LAST

C)AUDIO SELECT

[p]/[[]:Adjust



[AUTO LAST

D)DECODER MODE

[p]/[[]:Adjust



Notes

CLASSICAL

*LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAINMENT

*MOVIE

STEREO

SURROUNDDECODE

Press DSP key



E)PARAM.



INI

. ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR

ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR

ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT

ZONE3 AMP;;;;EXT

F)ZONE SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Adjust

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 99 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

100 En

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP

Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 2 and/or ZONE 3 speakers

are amplified.

Choices: EXT, [SP1], [SP2], BOTH

• Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2 or

Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier

connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3

OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select “[SP1]” to use the internal surround back

amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your

Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select “[SP2]” to use the internal surround amplifier of

this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or

Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP2 speaker terminals

on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select “BOTH” to use the internal surround and

surround back amplifiers of this unit when you want to

connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to

both the SP1 and the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear

panel of this unit.

• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”

menu, “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” and “BOTH” cannot be selected.

• When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE2 AMP”, only “EXT” can

be selected for “ZONE3 AMP”.

• When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE3 AMP”, only “EXT” can

be selected for “ZONE2 AMP”.

• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “[SP1]” or

“[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is

output from the surround back speakers.

• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “BOTH”

and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output

from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers

in the main zone.

• When both “ZONE2 AMP” and “ZONE3 AMP” are set to

“[SP1]” or “[SP2]” and Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, no

sound is output from both the surround speakers and the

surround back speakers in the main zone.

• When you use internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3, some

surround field programs may not work in the same way as when

you do not use the internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

■ XM Radio setting G)XM RADIO SET

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA

Use this feature to check the current reception level of the

XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this

unit (see page 61). For the best reception, orient the XM

Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is

displayed here.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

•

“NONE” is displayed if the XM Passport System is not connected to

this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 61).

• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using

the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of

the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit

for a better percentage of the reception level.

■ Dock set H)DOCK SET

Charge on standby STANDBY CHRG

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode (see page 73).

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed

iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby

mode.

• Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed

iPod only when this unit is turned on.

Notes

G)XM RADIO SET

.XM ANTENNA;;NONE



H)DOCK SET

.STANDBYCHRG;AUTO



[]/[]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 100 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

101 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 103).

■ Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this

unit (see page 6).

These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

These buttons control this unit only when the component

operation mode selector is set to AMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV.

To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote

control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 103). When

you set the remote control codes for both DTV and

PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV.

These buttons always control your TV regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on

page 102.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER Turns on or off the power.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 101 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

102 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons

or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for

each input source in advance (see page 103). The

following table shows the function of each control button

used to control other components assigned to each input

selector button or . Be advised that some buttons may

not correctly operate the selected component.

The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 14

different components.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons operate your VCR only when you set the appropriate remote control code for VCR 1 (see page 103).

These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 102.

Press and hold to search backward or forward.

Simple remote mode (see page 73)

AUX/DOCK

–

––

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

VOLUME

TV VOL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

(U.S.A. model)

DVD player/

DVD

recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite

tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner iPod

1 AV P OW E R

Power

VCR power

Power

2 CH +

channel up*3

Channel up Channel up Channel up

channel up*3

CH –

TV channel

down*3

Channel down Channel down Channel down

TV channel

down*3

TV channel

down*3

TV channel

down*3

TV channel

down*3

TV channel

down*3

TV channel

down*3

3 TITLE

Title Title Title Title Band

4 ENTER

Menu enter Menu select Menu select

Subsequent

PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up

Preset up

(1 to 8)

PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down

Preset down

(1 to 8)

Down

A-E/CAT. l Menu left Menu left Menu left

Preset down

(A to E)

A-E/CAT. h Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B

Preset up

(A to E)

Subsequent

5 RETURN

Return Return Return Return

6 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

7 ll

backward

VCR search

backward

VCR search

backward

backward*4

forward

VCR search

forward

VCR search

forward

forward*4

Skip

backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Direction

back

Skip

backward

a Skip forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

Skip

forward

REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

VCR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop

VCR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause

VCR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

Pause

(Play/Pause)*5

p Play Play

VCR play

Play Play Play Play

Play

(Play/Pause)*5

8 MENU

Menu Menu Menu

9 AUDIO

Audio Audio

0 DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

A ENT

Enter Enter/recall Enter

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 102 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

103 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Selecting a component to be controlled

You can select a component to be controlled

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons.

Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the

desired component.

The name of the component to be controlled appears in the

display window on the remote control.

■ Controlling optional components

(Option mode)

“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be

programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for

programming commands that are to be used only as a part

of a macro function or for components that do not have a

valid remote control code.

To select the option mode, press SELECT n

repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display

window on the remote control.

You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See

page 105 to program buttons operated within this component

control area.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL

CODES” at the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE

and then press an input selector button or

to select the input area you want to set up.

Note

SELECT

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

XM TUNER YAMAHA 2604

TUNER YAMAHA 2607

PHONO TV – –

TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602

CD CD YAMAHA 2300

MULTI CH

INPUT

DVD YAMAHA 2100

V-AUX/

DOCK

TUNER YAMAHA 2606

CBL/SAT CABLE – –

MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA 2500

CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400

DTV TV – –

VCR 1 VCR – –

DVR/VCR2 DVR YAMAHA 2807

DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100

Note

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SOURCE

AMP

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 103 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

104 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the

selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in

the display window on the remote control.

• You can set a remote control code of a different type of

component to an input area. Press l / h repeatedly to

change the library (component category).

Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,

L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),

L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),

L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR

• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input

selector button or , or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to

select the input area.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window.

0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.

4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the

component you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

5 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window on the remote

control if setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window on the remote

control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case,

start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button or , or

SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then

repeat steps 2 through 5.

6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether

you can control your component using the

remote control.

If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your

component has more than one code, try each of them until

you find the correct one.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control

if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or

when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the learn feature (see “Programming

codes from other remote controls”) or use the remote control

supplied with the component.

• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

Notes

Note

LEARN

Notes

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

LEARN

POWER

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 104 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

105 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program the function of

other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas

in the following illustration. The buttons can be

programmed independently for each input area.

The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most

of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some

special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the

operating instructions for the other remote control.

1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE

and then press an input selector button or

to select an input area.

Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE.

When you set the operation mode selector to AMP and program a

remote control codes from other remote controls, the

programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this

unit.

2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area

(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window

on the remote control.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.

4 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” appears in the display window on the

remote control.

Programming codes from other

remote controls

Note

AUX/DOCK

–

––

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

VOLUME

TV VOL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

(U.S.A. model)

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SOURCE

AMP

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

AUX/DOCK

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

(U.S.A. model)

Other remote control

LEARN

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

ENHANCER

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

NIGHT

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 105 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

106 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

5 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window on the

remote control.

“NG” appears in the display window on the remote

control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start

over from step 4.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4

and 5.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.

6 Press LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control

if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or

when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– when the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

You can change the name of the input source that appears

in the display window on the remote control if you want to

use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is

useful when you have set an input area to control a

different component.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button or to select the input area you want

to rename.

The name of the selected input area appears in the

display window.

2 Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from 2.

Notes

AUX/DOCK

SELECT

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model) Other remote control

LEARN

Changing source names in the

display window

Note

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

(U.S.A. model)

RENAME

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 106 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

107 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

3 Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character as follows:

A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),

/ (slash), and space.

Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.

4 Press h to move the cursor to the next

position.

Press l to move the cursor to the previous position.

5 Press ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window on the remote

control if renaming was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window on the remote

control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case,

start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to rename another input area, press

the input selector button or , or press SELECT k / n

repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3

through 5.

6 Press RENAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if

you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when

you press more than one button simultaneously.

This feature is useful when you change the input or output

assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.

Refer to “INPUT RENAME” on page 95.

The macro programming feature makes it possible to

perform a series of operations with the press of a single

button. For example, when you want to play a CD,

normally you would turn on the components, select the

CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The

macro programming feature lets you perform all of these

operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The

buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 109).

■ MACRO operations

1 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.

2 Press the desired macro button.

3 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF

when you finish to using the macro

programming operation.

• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does

not accept any other operation until it has completed running

the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

Note

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

RENAME

Macro programming features

Notes

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

MACRO

MACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

(U.S.A. model)

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 107 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

108 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Default macro functions

You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.

When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 103), you can turn on the power of your TV

without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.

When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD

recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that

component (see page 105) or set a remote control code (see page 103).

Pressing

macro button

To automatically transmit these signals in order

First Second Third

—

(*1)

—

(CD area) (*4)

—

(MD/TAPE area) (*4)

(CD-R area) (*4)

—

(VCR 1 area) (*4)

(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)

(DVD area) (*4)

STANDBY STANDBY

POWER

(*1)

POWER

(*2)

POWER

PHONO

POWER

PHONO

TUNER

(*3)

CD CD

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

AUX/DOC

CBL/SA

MD/TAP

CD-R CD-R

DTV DTV

VCR 1 VCR 1

DVR/VCR

DVD DVD

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 108 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

109 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macro and use the macro

programming feature to transmit several remote control

commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to

set up remote control codes or perform learning operations

before programming the macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

• We do not recommend programming continuous operations

such as volume control in a macro.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or

SOURCE and then press MACRO using a

ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the

selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear

alternately in the display window on the remote

control.

“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a

button other than a macro button.

3 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode. The

following example is for programming the following

procedure:

Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD.

Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER.

Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP.

To change the selected input area, press SELECT k / n.

Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,

whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area.

4 Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or

similar object when the operation sequence

you want to program is complete.

“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more

than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Note

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

(U.S.A. model)

Note

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

MCR 1: DVD

MCR 2: AV POWER

MCR 3: SLEEP

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 109 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

110 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names

and setup remote control ID.

■ Clearing function sets

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or

SOURCE and then press CLEAR by using a

ballpoint pen or similar object.

“CLEAR” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)

Clears all learned functions in the respective

input area. The name of a component is shown

after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector

button to select the input area.

L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the

amplifier functions of this unit.

L;ALL Clears all learned functions.

M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the

remote to the factory settings.

3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing

was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display

window on the remote control.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting, if you have set remote control codes).

• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to

complete.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a

button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Clearing configurations

Note

CLEAR

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

Notes

CLEAR

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 110 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

111 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button or to select the input area

containing the function you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name

(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display

window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step2.

3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object and then press the button

you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing

was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display

window on the remote control, release the ballpoint

pen or similar object used to press CLEAR to exit the

clearing mode. The remote control returns to the

learning mode.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 4.

• If you continuously want to clear another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

input area, then repeat step 4.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

4 Press LEARN again to exit.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if

clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

Notes

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

(U.S.A. model)

LEARN

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 111 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

112 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or

SOURCE and then press MACRO using a

ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote

control if clearing was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 2.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

3 Press MACRO again to exit the macro

programming mode.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if

clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control

if you press more than one button simultaneously.

Note

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

Notes

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

(U.S.A. model)

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 112 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

113 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this

unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can

control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.

• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second

and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.

• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

■ Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select

“EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100).

• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3 VOL” are set to

“FIX” (see page 99).

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third

room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

Notes

OUTOUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

YAMAHA

component

YAMAHA

component

Infrared signal

receiver

REMOTE OUT

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

MONITOR OUT

SP OUT

REMOTE IN

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT

REMOTE IN

MAIN

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Infrared emitter

DVD player

(or other component)

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second room

(Zone 2)

Third room

(Zone 3)

Main room

(Main zone)

SYSTEM

This unit

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 113 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

114 En

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “[SP1]” or “[SP2]”

for “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100).

If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both SP1 and SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “BOTH” for “ZONE2

AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100).

You can select the zone you want to control by using the

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.

■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3

Front panel operations

1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on

the front panel to individually turn on or off

Zone 2 or Zone 3.

2 Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel

repeatedly to select the zone you want to

control.

Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front

panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator

flashes when the main zone is selected.

ZONE2

Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.

ZONE3

Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

–

SP2

SINGLE

–

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE

SP1

Third room

(Zone 3)

This unit

Second room

(Zone 2)

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROLS

ZONE2

ZONE3

No indicator flashes when the main zone is

selected.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 114 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

115 En

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,

the currently selected zone mode is automatically

canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS again.

• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3

are turned on.

3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone

2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of

Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of

the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or

“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further

operations.

Remote control operations

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and

then press SELECT k repeatedly to select the

zone you want to control.

“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window on the remote control.

2 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone

2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of

Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of

the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or

“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further

operations.

3 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the

Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for

recording are always the same.

■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3

using the remote control

POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work

differently depending on the selected zone that appears in

the display window on the remote control.

• When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is

selected , you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or

Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually.

• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns

on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously

and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode

simultaneously.

• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”

appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is

pressed.

• “ALL” appears in the display window on the remote control

only when SELECT n is pressed.

■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or

set the operation mode selector to AMP and then

press one of the input selector buttons on the

remote control) to select the input source of the

selected zone.

If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:

name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the

selected input source” is displayed in the display window

on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected

respectively.

Note

SELECT

SOURCE

AMP

Control mode Display window

POWER

and

STANDBY

Main zone

mode

Name of the selected

input area

Turns on the main

zone only or sets it to

the standby mode.

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE 2” or “2;name

of the selected input

area”

Turns on Zone 2 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

Zone 3 mode

“ZONE 3” or “3;name

of the selected input

area”

Turns on Zone 3 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

All mode

“ALL”

POWER: turns on

the main zone, Zone

2 and Zone 3.

STANDBY: sets the

main zone, Zone 2

and Zone 3 to the

standby mode.

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 115 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

116 En

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER

features in the selected zone. For details about the

TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on

page 54.

• Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite

Radio features in the selected zone. For details about

the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM

SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 61.

The selected input source is shared across all zones.

You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected

zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently

selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press

ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again.

■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the

volume level of the selected zone.

Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to

the selected zone.

When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,

VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3

VOL” is set to “VAR” in “ZONE SET” (see page 99).

■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker

level in Zone 2 or Zone 3

Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

“BALANCE” and then rotate PROGRAM on the

front panel to adjust the balance of the front left

and right speaker level of the selected zone.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then

press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the

high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response

(BASS) respectively.

You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using

TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting

the tonal quality” on page 50.

Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality

of the corresponding zone (see page 115).

Note

INPUT

SOURCE

AMP

AUX/DOCK

DTV

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

DVD

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

(U.S.A. model)

–

VOLUME

Note

CONTROL

TONE

PROGRAM

–

TV VOL

–

SOURCE

AMP

TREBLE

BASS

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 116 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

ADVANCED SETUP

117 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see

page 31).

• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn

off this unit.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel

and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to

the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select the parameter you want to

adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

See page 118 for a complete list of available

parameters.

4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel

repeatedly to change the selected parameter

setting.

5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and turn off this unit.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on

this unit.

ADVANCED SETUP

Notes

Using ADVANCED SETUP

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

2,43

1-2,5

(U.S.A. model)

MASTER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

PROGRAM

MIN

IMP.SPEAKER

Currently selected

parameter setting

Currently selected

parameter

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 117 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

118 En

ADVANCED SETUP

■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN

• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .

• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .

■ User presets USER PRESET

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to

the initial factory settings (see page 130).

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this

unit.

• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.

• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit

including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the

advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on

this unit.

■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the

front panel of this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” if you want to activate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.

■ Wake on RS-232C access

WAKE ON RS232C

Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-

232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.

Choices: YES, NO

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES

[Other models]: NO

• Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

• Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

■ Remote control AMP ID

RC AMP ID

Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote

control recognition (see page 104).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “2001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “2002”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library

code for the remote control (see page 104).

■ Remote control TUNER ID

RC TUNER ID

Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for

remote control recognition (see page 121).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “2602”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “2603”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library

code for the remote control (see page 121).

■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote

control recognition (see page 121).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library

code is set to “2604”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library

code is set to “2605”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library

code for the remote control (see page 121).

SPEAKER

IMP.

Speaker Impedance level

8ΩMIN

Front

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

6ΩMIN

Front

The impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

Notes

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 118 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

119 En

ADVANCED SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South

America.

• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.

■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP

Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-AMP

function.

• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP

function.

When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals

cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the

SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP

connection (see page 17).

■ Video reset VIDEO RESET

Use to initialize the parameter settings for “DISPLAY

SET” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 97).

Choices: YES, CANCEL

The parameter setting for “DIMMER”, “SHORT MESSAGE”,

“ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL” is not initialized (see

page 97).

hen using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

■ Setting remote control AMP ID

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or

SOURCE.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object and

then press l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP”

appears in the display window on the remote

control.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

3 Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window on the remote control.

Note

Setting remote control ID

Notes

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

LEARN

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 119 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

120 En

ADVANCED SETUP

4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the input

area you want to use.

Remote control AMP codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

AMP code for the input area you want to use.

You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID

(see page 118).

5 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if the setting

was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.

6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

■ Setting remote control tuner ID or XM ID

1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or

SOURCE and then press TUNER or XM on

the remote control to select the tuner or XM

to change the remote control ID.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object and

then press l / h repeatedly until “L;TUN”

and “TUNER”, or “L;TUN” and “XM”

alternately appear in the display window on

the remote control.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

3 Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window on the remote control.

AMP library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control AMP

2001

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2002

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

Note

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

LEARN

Notes

TUNER

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

LEARN

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 120 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

121 En

ADVANCED SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the input

area you want to use.

Remote control tuner codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

tuner code for the input area you want to use.

Remote control XM codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

XM code for the input area you want to use.

You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID

or XM ID (see page 118).

5 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if the setting

was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.

6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Tuner library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control

tuner ID

2602

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2603

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

XM library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control XM

2604

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2605

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

Note

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

ENTER

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

LEARN

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 121 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

TROUBLESHOOTING

122 En

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire

for each connection does not touch anything other

than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

or strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then

use it normally.

—

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

21-27

The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.

Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,

“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.

Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG” while playing a source

encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.

Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or

“COAX/OPT”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector

buttons on the remote control).

38, 41

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control

to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”

and “HDMI” audio signals are not being

played back on this unit.

Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V1700” in

“MANUAL SETUP”.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 122 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

123 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Set “V CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source

components in the same way as you connect your

video monitor to this unit.

Non-standard video signals are input.

Short message

displays do not

appears in the video

monitor

“SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”. Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”.

“GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”. Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”.

“V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. Set “V CONV.” to “ON”.

The signals input at the HDMI IN1 or

HDMI IN2 jack are being output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

Video signals in the progressive format or

HDTV video signals are being input.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.

30, 118

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control

to resume audio output.

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

presence speakers

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2-

channel source is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.

The source does not contain low-

frequency signals.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 123 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

124 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE” and “SB L/R SP” is

automatically set to “NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SB L/R SP” to a setting

other than “NONE”.

“SB L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SB L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG”.

Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while a record is

being played.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-

head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

Turn on the power of the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

22, 24

Some components cannot record Dolby

Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT (REC)

jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”

is set to “ON”.

Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 124 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

125 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

57, 58

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises can result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.

—

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 125 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

126 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM Passport and XM Passport Home

Dock are not connected to the XM jack of

this unit or do not work properly.

Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock

connections and orient for the best reception level.

UPDATING

The XM user encryption code is being

updated.

Wait until the encryption code is updated.

—

NO SIGNAL

The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for

the best reception level.

It takes longer than four seconds for audio

or text data to be decoded.

Wait until the decoding process has finished.

—

OFF AIR

The XM Satellite Radio channel you

selected is not currently broadcasting any

signals.

Check the channel number again or select another

XM Satellite Radio channel.

—

<XM> - - -

The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - -

No artist name or song title is available.

<CAT> - - -

No channels are available for the selected

category.

Select another channel category by pressing

CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on

the remote control) repeatedly.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 126 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

127 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Remote control

■ HDMI

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

The operation mode selector is set

incorrectly.

Set the operation mode selector correctly.

When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO

area, set it to the TV position.

—

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end

of this manual.

103

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

103

The library code of the remote control and

the remote control ID of this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the

corresponding remote control library code.

104, 118

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

105

The remote control

does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

105

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

110

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

DEVICE OVER

The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP ERROR

HDCP authentication failed.

Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 127 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

128 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod

(see page 27).

■ AUTO SETUP

Before AUTO SETUP

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod.

—

Unknown type

The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected

Your iPod is properly stationed in a

YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as

the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this

unit is complete.

Disconnected

Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod.

—

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC!

Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug HP!

Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.

—

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 128 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

129 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

During AUTO SETUP

After AUTO SETUP

• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.

• If warning “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.

• If warning “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made.

• If error “E-10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP

Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections.

E-2:NO SURR.SP

A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections.

E-3:NO PRNS. SP

A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections.

E-4:SBR->SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the

LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS

terminal if you only have one surround

back speaker.

E-5:NOISY

Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet

environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the

optimizer microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR.

Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use

surround back speakers.

E-7:NO MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

E-8:NO SIGNAL

The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 32

Check the speaker connections and

placement.

E-9:USER CANCEL

The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was

cancelled due to user activity.

Run “AUTO SETUP” again.

E-10:INTERNAL ERROR

An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again.

Warning message Cause Remedy

See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper

polarity (+ or –).

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)

The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening

position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Readjust the speaker installation so that all

speakers are set in locations with similar

conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections. 14

Use speakers of similar quality.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 32

Notes

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 129 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

130 En

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup

menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it

outward to the OFF position.

1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn

off this unit.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel

and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to

the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select “PRESET”.

4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel

repeatedly to select “RESET”.

Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to

confirm your selection and turn off this unit.

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

Notes

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

ENHANCER

NIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

MULTI ZONE

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CATEGORY

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

ON/OFF

2,43

1-2,5

(U.S.A. model)

MASTER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

PROGRAM

CANCEL

USERPRESET

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

RESET

USERPRESET

MASTER

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 130 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

GLOSSARY

131 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a

speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section

of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the

combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement

each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.

This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much

simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence

the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high

pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes

frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above

the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes

frequencies above its cutoff.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P

and P

R signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A

monitor with component input jacks is required in order to

output component signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ Dialogue normalization

Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or

DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same

average listening level so the user does not have to change

the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS

programs.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system

has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to

minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels

and the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented

excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound

environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel

configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie

sources and “Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”

for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for

2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game

sources.

GLOSSARY

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 131 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

132 En

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is

widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,

and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby

Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the

volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects

and directionality.

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio

signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio

CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at

a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while

noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce

distortion, a common occurrence with very high

quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling

rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered

by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original

96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-

quality full-motion video for music programs and motion

picture soundtracks on DVD video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,

front left and right, center, surround left and right, and

LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).

This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel

to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such

as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video

monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI

transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-

channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators. For further

information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The

frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There

are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources

and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ Neural Surround

Neural Surround

™

represents the latest advancement in

surround technology and has been adopted by XM

Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround

recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural

Surround

™

employs psychoacoustic frequency domain

processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound

stage with superior channel separation and localization of

audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to

7.1 multi-channel surround playback.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code

Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 132 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

133 En

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can

be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,

while the dynamic range representing the sound level

difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.

In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider

the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the

higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the

sound level can be reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 133 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

134 En

■ Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field in addition to the

direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s

instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any

size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is

exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound

field processor.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your

own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any surround speakers by

using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to

enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

■ Sound output from each speaker

Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of

audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the

table below to understand the speaker layout for each

sound field program. For details about the sound output

from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to

“SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD

PROGRAM” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.

Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from

speakers depending on the type of input source being played

back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be

used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of

movies, such as special sound effects, etc.

Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you

can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back

speakers (see page 45).

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

Note

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 134 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

135 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the

Parametric EQ settings (see page 91), to optimize the

frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to

match your listening environment. YPAO uses a

combination of the following three parameters

(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise

adjustment of the frequency characteristics.

■ Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■ Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 135 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

SPECIFICATIONS

136 En

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 160/195/255/335 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)

[Asia, General, China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 175 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 180 W

• Dynamic Headroom

8 Ω ....................................................................................... 0.9 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 130 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.4 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω

PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................ 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ........... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to OUT (REC)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more

[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD, etc.

(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .............. 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz

• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 450 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 2.0 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Format (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ..................... NTSC

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL

• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)

.................................................................................... 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 0.2/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .................................................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo ............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

SPECIFICATIONS

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 136 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

137 En

SPECIFICATIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General and Asia model]

....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] .................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ....................... 0.33 W or less

[Other models] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]

6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Asia, General and China models] ........ 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[Australia and U.K. models] ..... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm

(17.1 x 6.7 x 17.3 in)

• Weight .................................................................. 17.0 kg (38.8 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries

Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want

you to get the most out of your equipment by

playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying

blaring or distortion – and, most importantly,

without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage

from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late,

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure

from excessive volume levels.

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 137 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-i

SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

/ / : OFF

/ / : ON, PRIORITY: PRNS

/ / : ON, PRIORITY: SB

Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker

Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker

Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output

Speaker from which no sound is being output

Program

Input source

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

Hall in Vienna

Hall in

Amsterdam

Church in

Freiburg

Chamber

LIVE/CLUB

Village

Vanguard

Warehouse Loft

Cellar Club

The Roxy

Theatre

The Bottom Line

ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Action Game

Roleplaying

Game

Music Video

Recital/Opera

MOVIE

STANDARD

(PRO LOGIC)

(Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

(Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

(Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

SBR

C SR PL

SBL

PL x

SBRSBL

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-ii

MOVIE

STANDARD

(PLII Movie)

(PLIIx Movie)

(Neo:6 Cinema)

PRIORITY: PRNS (Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

(Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

(Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

PRIORITY: SB

MOVIE

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

Drama

Mono Movie

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Monaural playback

STEREO

7ch Stereo

Program

Input source

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

SBRSBL

SL SR

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-iii

SURROUND DECODE

PRO LOGIC

PRO LOGIC Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

SURROUND DECODE

PLII Movie

PLII Music

PLII Game

Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Music

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Movie

PLIIx Music

PLIIx Game

Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Music

Program

Input source

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

SBRSBL

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-iv

SURROUND DECODE

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

Cinema Cinema/Music Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Music

SURROUND DECODE

neural sur.

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

STRAIGHT

Monaural playback

PURE DIRECT

Monaural playback

Program

Input source

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

SBRSBL

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iv Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-v

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM 0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE 0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE 0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH 0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS 0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS 0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCLAREN 0184

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

YAMAHA 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

YAMAHA 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,

0782, 0821, 0823,

0857, 1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE 0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME 0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC 0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL 0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 05 30

URBAN CONCEPTS 0530

XBOX 0549

YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

DVD RECORDER

HITACHI 2815

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

PHILIPS 2808

PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806

SHARP 2812, 2813

SONY 2809, 2810, 2811

TOSHIBA 28 03

VICTOR 2814

YAMAHA 2807

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN 0086

YAMAHA 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL 1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC 1216

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page v Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-vi

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

CAPETRONIC 0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC 1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS 1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN 0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,

2601

(TUNER ID1) 2602

(TUNER ID2) 2603

(XM ID1) 2604

(XM ID2) 2605

(iPod) 2606

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL 0880

CANAL SATELLITE 0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS 0423

CROSSDIGITAL 1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER 0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,

1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK 0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC 1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL 1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE 0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

YAMAHA 2700,2701

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,

0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN 0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL 0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG 0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vi Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-vii

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,

0081, 0087, 0120,

0172, 0181, 0193,

0478, 0729, 1174,

1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND 0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH 0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON 0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY 0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION 0064, 0291,

0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC 0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER 0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,

0131, 0132, 0136,

0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX 0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN 0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,

0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,

0539, 0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,

0181, 0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI 0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION 0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ 0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-viii

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW 0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,

0362, 0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER 0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677,

0796, 0860,

2900 (projector),

2901 (projector),

2903,

2904 (projector)

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION 0305

AMERICAN HIGH 0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL 0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,

0087, 1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME 0064

ELECTROPHONIC 0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON 0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC 1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA 0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page viii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

APPENDIX-ix

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ix Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page x Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V1700

Printed in Malaysia WH63550

RX-V1700

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM

Transcripción de documentos

RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM U RX-V1700 RX-V1700 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WH63550 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. iii 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 32 BASIC OPERATION Basic procedure ....................................................... 38 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 40 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 41 Using your headphones............................................ 41 Muting the audio output........................................... 41 Displaying the input source information ................. 42 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source.................. 43 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 43 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS............................. 44 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 44 Sound field program descriptions............................ 45 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 49 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 50 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 50 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 50 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 51 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 51 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode .................................................... 52 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 53 USING iPod ...........................................................73 Controlling iPod ...................................................... 73 RECORDING ........................................................75 ADVANCED OPERATION ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS.....76 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 76 Selecting decoders ................................................... 80 CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ..........................................84 Using SET MENU................................................... 86 1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 87 2 SOUND MENU.................................................... 91 3 INPUT MENU...................................................... 94 4 OPTION MENU................................................... 97 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................101 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .......................................... 101 Setting remote control codes ................................. 103 Programming codes from other remote controls ... 105 Changing source names in the display window..... 106 Macro programming features ................................ 107 Clearing configurations ......................................... 110 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ...113 Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 113 Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 114 ADVANCED SETUP ..........................................117 Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................. 117 Setting remote control ID ...................................... 119 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................122 RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................130 GLOSSARY.........................................................131 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION .............................................134 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION .............................................135 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................136 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) • SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM • LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES 1 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 38 Connecting the XM Passport System ...................... 61 XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 62 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 63 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 65 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 70 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 71 ADVANCED OPERATION AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ...................61 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 13 Connecting speakers ................................................ 14 Using bi-amplification connections......................... 17 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 18 Information on HDMI.............................................. 19 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 20 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 21 Connecting other components ................................. 22 Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ......................................... 26 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 27 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 27 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 28 Connecting the power cable..................................... 29 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 30 Turning on and off the power .................................. 31 FM/AM controls and functions ............................... 54 Automatic tuning ..................................................... 55 Manual tuning.......................................................... 56 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 57 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 58 Selecting preset stations........................................... 59 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 60 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 8 Preparing the remote control ..................................... 9 Front panel display .................................................. 10 Rear panel ................................................................ 12 FM/AM TUNING..................................................54 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier iPod controlling capability ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Surround: 130 W + 130 W Surround back: 130 W + 130 W ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Passport System” sold separately) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience Other features ◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input ◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and macro capability ◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS ◆ Sleep timer HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a ◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. iPod® “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. 2 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control (except Europe model) POWER XM TUNER SELECT 1 DTV AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH CD CD-R 2 3 STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 5 4 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 7 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 8 TV SET MENU TITLE PURE DIRECT Batteries (6) (AAA, R03, UM-4) VOLUME PRESET MENU SRCH MODE BAND A/B/C/D/E AUDIO ENTER MUTE A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT A-E/CAT. DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 0 9 DISPLAY MOVIE 1 STEREO 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT PRESET/CH ALL PRESET ID1 ID2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Speaker terminal wrench Power cable Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia, General, and Korea models) Indoor FM antenna (Europe, U.K. and Australia models) AM loop antenna About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. 3 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about other control and functions. • AM/FM tuning ........................... see page 54 • XM satellite radio tuning ........... see page 62 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER C D E 1 MASTER ON/OFF Turns this unit on or off (see page 31). 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode (see page 31). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 3 INPUT selector Selects the desired input source (see page 38). 4 En F G (U.S.A. model) 4 AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and “ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or more input jacks (see page 40). 5 TONE CONTROL Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left, front right and center channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector (see page 50). 6 STRAIGHT Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 49). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 7 MULTI ZONE buttons ZONE 3 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode. See page 114 for details. Note D OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied optimizer microphone in the “AUTO SETUP” procedure (see page 32). These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. E PHONES jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 41). ZONE CONTROLS Switches the zone you want to control between the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. See page 114 for details. F VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console or a video camera (see page 27). y After you press ZONE CONTROLS, the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. 8 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 10). 9 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 52). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. G VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. y This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. 0 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 9). ■ Opening and closing the front panel door A NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53). When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. B PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 50). To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. 5 En INTRODUCTION ZONE 2 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode. See page 114 for details. C PROGRAM selector • Selects sound field programs (see page 44). • Adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 50). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control ■ Remote control controls and functions This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about other control and functions. • AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54 • XM satellite radio tuning ........................ see page 62 • Controlling a TV ................................... see page 101 • Controlling other components ............... see page 102 • Controlling option components ............. see page 103 1 2 Note B POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO 3 TUNER STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD C D E F V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 4 SELECT + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE 5 TV INPUT G SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 6 PURE DIRECT 7 PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY 8 9 H The selected input source name appears in the display window on the remote control showing which source is currently operational. I J 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. K L 5 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 51). AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT M N MOVIE O P Q R REC DISC SKIP 0 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR S t U A (U.S.A. model) 6 En RENAME 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. y TV MUTE PRESET/CH LEVEL 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 9). 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. AMP + The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the operation mode selector position. Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit. 6 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or the “SET MENU” parameters. 7 RETURN Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters. 8 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 44). 9 SUR. DECODE Activates decoders to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 80). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS I VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. A MACRO Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a single button (see page 107). J MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 41). B STANDBY Sets the main zone to the standby mode (see page 31). K PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the pure direct mode (see page 50). Note L SET MENU Enters “SET MENU” (see page 86). This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. C POWER Turns on the main zone (see page 31). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. D AUDIO SEL Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and “ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or more input jacks (see page 40). E SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 43). F MULTI CH IN Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external decoder, etc. (see page 41). G SELECT k / n Selects another input source that you can control independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. H Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 102). M PARAMETER Displays sound field parameter settings in the on-screen display (OSD) (see page 76). N STRAIGHT Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 49). O EXTD SUR. Switches between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 80). P SELECT Selects decoders for 2-channel sources (see pages 80 and 82). Q ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 52). R NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53). S RENAME Changes the name of the input source in the display window (see page 106). T CLEAR Clears remote control functions acquired from the learn, macro and/or rename features (see page 110). U LEARN Programs remote control codes of functions from other remote controls (see page 105). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 101). Notes • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 103. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and PHONO (see page 103), priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. 7 En INTRODUCTION 0 MACRO ON/OFF Turns on or off the macro function (see page 107). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control This section describes the function of each control on the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control the amplifier functions of Zone 2 or Zone 3. See the following pages for details about other controls and functions. 1 Input selector buttons Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3. • AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54 • XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................... see page 62 3 POWER Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3. Note Note Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control is supplied with U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K., China, Asia and General models only. This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 4 STANDBY Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode. POWER XM 3 TUNER CD CD-R 1 2 3 DTV 1 5 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 7 4 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 8 A/B/C/D/E 6 MUTE A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PRESET/CH ALL PRESET ID1 ID2 2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER (U.S.A. model) 8 En This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 5 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3. 5 VOLUME PRESET Note STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 4 2 ID1/ID2 switch Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see page 104). 7 6 MUTE Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 7 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that of Zone 3. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Preparing the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. ■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control (Except Europe model) Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. Remote control sensor 1 3 2 Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. 30 30 Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 9 En INTRODUCTION ■ Installing batteries in the remote control 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display Note The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 65. 1 2 3 V-AUX DOCK 4 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE 5 CD-R CD PHONO 6 MULTI CH TUNER XM neural VIRTUAL HiFi DSP YPAO ENHANCER SILENT DSD PCM 0 A B C D E F DIGITAL PL x EX dB VOLUME MUTE 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE 96 24 7 neural DSD PCM VIRTUAL HiFi DSP YPAO ENHANCER SILENT CINEMA DIGITAL PL x EX MATRIX DISCRETE G 96 24 8 H I 9 L M N O P J K TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY ZONE3 RT NIGHT CT SLEEP EON PTY HOLD TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY ZONE3 RT NIGHT CT SLEEP EON PTY HOLD 0 ........ U.S.A. and Canada models only P ........ U.K. and Europe models only 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 19). 8 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. 9 Input channel and speaker indicators 2 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 27). Presence speaker indicators L C R LFE SL SB SR Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND MENU” when “TEST” in “SOUND MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 92). 4 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 5 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. 7 Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 10 En Surround back speaker indicators Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. 3 Battery charge indicator Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit. (see page 73). 6 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 41). Input channel indicators y You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND MENU”. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS A DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP sound field programs are selected. CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 45). HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 45). B VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 49). C YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 32). D DSD indicator Lights up when this unit is producing DSD (Direct Stream Digital) digital audio signals. E ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 52). F PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. G Dolby decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the Dolby decoders of this unit function. H Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field I Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 41). J SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 49). K DTS decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DTS decoders of this unit function. L Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite Radio tuning mode. TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 54). STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit (see page 54). AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 54). MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 57). M ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on (see page 114). N NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 53). O SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 43). P Radio Data System indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) PS, PTY, RT and CT Light up according to the selected Radio Data System display mode. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 11 En INTRODUCTION 0 neural indicator (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Lights up when the Neural Surround decoder is activated (see page 81). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 MONITOR OUT 3 4 COMPONENT VIDEO A DVD B DTV C CBL/SAT Y 5 VIDEO DVD CBL/SAT DTV IN 6 7 8 ANTENNA VCR 1 OUT IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT MONITOR OUT FM Y GND AC IN AM S VIDEO PB PB PR PR IN (PLAY) IN REMOTE VIDEO OUT (REC) R MD/ + SP1 PRESENCE + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SPEAKERS + L WRENCH HOLDER L TAPE OUT R HDMI GND PHONO IN 2 L CBL/ SAT R CD CD-R CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SINGLE CENTER + + AC OUTLETS R IN(PLAY) IN 1 OUT(REC) AUDIO XM DOCK SUB WOOFER SURROUND + L R PRESENCE WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT + SUR.BACK/ SUB SB(8CH) SP2 L ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT PRE OUT + DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL OUT 1 CD 2 DVD DVR/ 3 VCR2 4 CD 5 DVD 6 DTV 7 CBL/ SAT 8 MD/ TAPE R + + FRONT L 9 CD-R 2 1 CONTROL OUT RS-232C (U.S.A. model) 9 0 A B C D CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT F E CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SUR.BACK/ SUB PRESENCE WOOFER PRE OUT ZONE OUT G H 1 REMOTE jacks See page 113 for details. 0 DOCK terminal See page 27 for connection information. 2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 21 and 22 for connection information. A XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) See page 61 for connection information. 3 Audio component jacks See page 24 for connection information. B DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks See page 22 for connection information. 4 Video component jacks See pages 21 and 22 for connection information. C CONTROL OUT jack This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. 5 ANTENNA terminals See page 28 for connection information. 6 WRENCH HOLDER Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when not in use (see page 15). 7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) See page 29 for details. D RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your dealer for details. E Speaker terminals See page 14 for connection information. F MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 26 for connection information. 8 AC IN/OUTLET(S) See page 29 for connection information. G PRE OUT jacks See page 25 for connection information. 9 HDMI connectors See page 19 for connection information. H ZONE OUT jacks See page 113 for connection information. 12 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. PL PR C Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 30˚ SL SR 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as that of the front speakers. PR FR PL SW FL SR SBR C SBL SL 1.8 m (6 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL PR FR FL C 1.8 m (6 ft) Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 134). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 13 En PREPARATION FR FL Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 31). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 30). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 118). Notes • A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. • The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89) are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87). • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 89). • You can use the PRESENCE terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 113). Subwoofer Surround back speakers Left Right Presence speakers Left Right Center speaker R R + SP1 PRESENCE + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + SPEAKERS + SINGLE SURROUND L CENTER + + + L SUB R WOOFER SP2 L PRE OUT R + FRONT + L (U.S.A. model) Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers (see page 113) Left Right Surround speakers Left Right Front speakers 14 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect front left and right speakers to these terminals. ■ Connecting the speaker cable CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker to these terminals. 1 SURROUND terminals Connect surround left and right speakers to these terminals. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back left and right speakers to these terminals. Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (0.4 in) When you use a surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE). 2 PRESENCE terminals Connect presence left and right speakers to these terminals. Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. 15 En PREPARATION Note 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS 5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this unit when not in use. ■ Connecting the banana plug (except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Banana plug ■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker terminals 1 Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see page 113). 1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench Open the tab. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 2 Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Insert one bare wire into the hole on the terminal. y 3 Close the tab to secure the wire. 16 En You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Using bi-amplification connections ■ Bi-amplification connection To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 119). This unit + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + FRONT SINGLE PREPARATION Some of the speakers have speaker wire connections that allow bi-amplification to enhance the performance of the speaker system. This unit allows you to make biamplification connection to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-amplification. As these speakers are shipped to you, you will note shorting bars or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and the other connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-amplify your speakers. + ■ Conventional connection If you want to connect your speakers as traditional loudspeakers using the conventional connection method, connect your speakers using the regular left and right speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of terminals. R + L This unit R + + FRONT L Right Left Front speakers Note Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. Right Left Front speakers Shorting bars or bridges Shorting bars or bridges 17 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL DIGITAL L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Note You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. 18 En S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y This unit equips the video connection function. See pages 20 and 97 for details. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Information on HDMI This unit has the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI OUT jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector). The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of the selected input source are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Note You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 42). Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz,1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. PREPARATION ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI HDMI cable plug This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. y • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. • The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “V CONV.” to “ON” in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 98) to activate this feature. 19 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Input Output Output HDMI HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO Digital output Through Analog output Video conversion (see page 97) Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” (see page 93). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. Component interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) Notes • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 98). • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 98) and HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) are available only when “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97). • Use the “HDMI I/P” parameter in “OPTION MENU” to deinterlace the analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 98). When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen. • The OSD signal is not output at the VCR 1 OUT and DVR/VCR 2 OUT jacks and is not recorded. • The color of the letters and images in the OSD may differ depending on the input signals and your video monitor. 20 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. y Notes • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • Set “V CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the short message display and parameter displays. • Set “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the parameter displays. • The SET MENU and parameter displays appear with the gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting of the parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (see page 97). COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR HDMI OUT (U.S.A. model) Y PB V PR Component video in S Video in S-video in HDMI in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 21 En PREPARATION You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 93). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting other components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • When “V CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 97), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 21). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 94). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. • The parameter displays do not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p are input. • The parameter and short message displays do not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack. ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player Optical out HDMI out Coaxial out Audio out Component out S-video out C PR PB Y Video out S COMPONENT VIDEO A DVD R V VIDEO DVD Y PB PR L R HDMI IN 1 DIGITAL INPUT DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL 2 DVD 5 DVD (U.S.A. model) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 22 En L O 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR Note *1 When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR 1 terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR/VCR 2 terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. *1 VIDEO VCR 1 IN OUT IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT S VIDEO VIDEO L R PREPARATION R IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL R DVR/ 3 VCR2 L V S S-video in R Video in R Audio in L Audio out V Video out S S-video out C Coaxial out (U.S.A. model) DVD recorder, PVR or VCR ■ Connecting set-top boxes Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver HDTV decoder HDMI out Component out Optical out COMPONENT VIDEO B DTV C CBL/SAT S S V L R Audio out V Video out L S-video out R S-video out O Video out Y Audio out PB Optical out Component out PR O PR PB Y VIDEO DTV CBL/SAT Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR L R HDMI IN 2 CBL/ SAT DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL 6 DTV 7 CBL/ SAT (U.S.A. model) 23 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting audio components Notes • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 94). • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. • When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. Audio out Optical in L O R Audio in CD recorder L R IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) MD/ L TAPE R GND PHONO CD CD-R L R IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD 8 MD/ TAPE 4 CD 9 CD-R (U.S.A. model) R Ground Audio out L R L O C Audio out Coaxial out R Optical out L R Audio out O L Audio in Optical in Turntable 24 En CD player MD recorder or tape deck 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Notes 1 2 CENTER FRONT 3 PREPARATION • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. • The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 50). • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 51). • Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87). 4 SURROUND SINGLE(SB) L R SUR.BACK/ SUB PRESENCE WOOFER PRE OUT 5 1 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. 2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. 3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack. y • Set the “SB L/R SP” to “LRGx2”, “LRGx1”, “SMLx2” or “SMLx1” and “PRESENCE SP” to “NONE” (see page 89) to output the surround back channel signals at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. • Set the “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” and “SB L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 89) to output the presence channel signals at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. 25 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 96), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in MULTI CH SET (see page 96) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 41), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input ( CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND ) ( C) MD/ L TAPE L *1 R R CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) L MULTI CH INPUT L L R R R WOOFER Surround out SUB SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT R L R L R Front out Center out Subwoofer out Surround out L Surround back out Front out Center out Subwoofer out SUB Multi-format player/ External decoder Multi-format player/ External decoder Note *1 26 En The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 96). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Do not connect this unit to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT CATEGORY INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O DOCK YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) S-Video output Video output Audio output Optical output Game console or video camera 27 En PREPARATION CAUTION Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes • Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 119). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. Indoor FM antenna (supplied) AM loop antenna (supplied) ANTENNA FM GND AM (U.S.A. model) Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. y ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna. 28 En Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations (see page 54). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable CAUTION Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire or electrical shock. Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power cable into an AC wall outlet. (U.S.A. model) PREPARATION AC IN To the AC wall outlet AC OUTLETS ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) CAUTION The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet Korea model ............................................................... None Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 136. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. Voltage indication 29 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 4 If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT SPEAKER IMP. EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO 6 MIN OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER 2,5 1 3 5 2,4 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 31 for details about turning on or off this unit. MASTER 2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT While holding down EFFECT 3 MASTER Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SPEAKER IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM SPEAKER IMP. 8 MIN 30 En Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV PURE DIRECT XM STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN POWER VOLUME PHONO AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER TUNER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON PREPARATION OFF MASTER MASTER ON/OFF ■ Turning on this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turns on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/ OFF, the main zone is turned on. ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main zone. MAIN ZONE POWER ON/OFF or MASTER Front panel ■ Turning off this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Front panel Remote control ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby mode. MAIN ZONE STANDBY MASTER ON/OFF or Front panel Notes Front panel Remote control • MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this unit. 31 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 1 Once you have connected the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your listening room, run “AUTO SETUP” in the OSD or in the front panel display. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT Notes DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. YPAO PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX Omni-directional microphone y • You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure and an error or warning message appears in the OSD or in the front panel display, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 128 and 129 for a complete list of error and warning messages and proper remedies. • The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold. • If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH MENU SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 32 En Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone 4 TV MUTE SET MENU TITLE BAND 2 4,14 3-13 y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use a 6 mm diameter screw to fix the optimizer microphone to a tripod (etc.). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP 3 SET MENU SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO ENTER A-E/CAT. This unit performs the following checks: Speaker wiring WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. p p Press ENTER to enter “AUTO SETUP”. The “AUTO:MENU” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH 1 AUTO:MENU A-E/CAT. p p .SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK START []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Select p [ ENTER Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 6 1 AUTO:MENU SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO .WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK START []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Select p [ MENU SRCH MODE TV 5 PRESET/CH Press l / h to select “SETUP”. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Choices: AUTO, RELOAD • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. When you select “RELOAD”, the previous auto setup result appears in the OSD. See step 7 on page 34 and carry out the operations. Note “RELOAD” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. Choices: CHECK, SKIP • Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust the item. • Select “SKIP” to skip the item and perform no adjustments. Parametric equalizer level EQ Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer level of each channel to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the frequency response of each channel is adjusted in accordance with the sound output from your front speakers. Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT, SKIP • Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little harsh. • Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. • Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. • Select “SKIP” to skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. 33 En PREPARATION AMP SOURCE Press k / n repeatedly to select “WIRING”, “DISTANCE”, “SIZE”, “EQ”, or “LEVEL”. p Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 7 p 4 Make sure of the following check points before starting the AUTO SETUP operations. • Speakers are connected appropriately. • Supplied optimizer microphone is connected to this unit and placed appropriately. • Headphones are disconnected from this unit. • The room is sufficiently quiet. • The video monitor connected to this unit is turned on. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP Volume level LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Choices: CHECK, SKIP • Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust this item. • Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no adjustments. 8 Press n to select “START” and then press ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the “RESULT:EXIT” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Notes • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. The display changes as follows. 1 AUTO:MENU p p SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK . START []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ 2 AUTO:CHECK p INITIALIZING .PRE CHECK MAIN CHECK EQUALIZING LEVEL CHECK CH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []: Exit RESULT:EXIT 34 En p p . RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 36. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 37). • Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 89) is automatically set to “REVERSE”. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP 9 Press ENTER to display the setup results in detail. 10 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK Results of the speaker connection and wiring []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return p p . RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter RESULT:DISTANCE1 FRONT L;;14.0ft CENTER;;;17.0ft FRONT R;;15.0ft PRNS L;;;17.0ft PRNS R;;;17.0ft RESULT:WIRING Results of the speaker distance from the listening position []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return FRONT L;;;;;;;OK RESULT:SIZE FRONT L;;;;;;LRG []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return Results of the frequency response of each speaker []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return RESULT:EQ CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB 2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB 3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB 4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB 5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB 6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB 7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return RESULT:LEVEL1 FRONT L;;;+1.0dB CENTER;;;;-1.5dB FRONT R;;;+6.5dB PRNS L;;;;-9.0dB PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker Results of the speaker output level []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return y If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 84). Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. • The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 35 En PREPARATION RESULT:EXIT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP 11 ■ If an error screen appears Press ENTER to return to the top “RESULT:EXIT” display. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT A-E/CAT. p 12 p . RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET” and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT A-E/CAT. p p RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .[ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. 13 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO ENTER 14 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Notes • After you have completed the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. 36 En Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. ERROR E-9:USER CANCEL . Don't operate any function. .[ RETRY EXIT [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the “RESULT:EXIT” display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 PREPARATION Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. RESULT:EXIT 2 p p . WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. WARNING: W-1 < OUT OF PHASE > Reverse Channel FL -CENTER PL PR SL SR SBL SBR p [ : Select []/[] [ENTER] : Enter y • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 128. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. 3 Press ENTER to return to the top “RESULT:EXIT” display. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT ENTER A-E/CAT. p p WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .[ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 37 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. y To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the playback (see page 96). Basic procedure 2 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER INPUT NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER 2 5 Front panel 4 or POWER POWER TV AV XM STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE PURE DIRECT XM MENU SRCH MODE BAND AMP PHONO TUNER CD PHONO AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD PARAMETER 2 SELECT V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT EFFECT XM MEMORY 5 SOURCE STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT TV DTV VCR 1 Remote control AMP + + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV 2 4 REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. (U.S.A. model) 1 Available input sources V-AUX Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD INPUT: MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM DVD y • See page 42 to display the input source information. • You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 97). • You can change the display settings by using “SHORT MESSAGE” parameter in “DISPLAY SET”. See pages 98 for details. 38 En Currently selected input source Note For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source, see page 65. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK 3 4 Note Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 54 for details about tuning instructions. • See page 65 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40). Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 76 for details. VOLUME ■ Guide to contents + or y VOLUME – When you want to... Front panel Remote control See page 51 to adjust the level of each speaker. 5 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 45 for details about sound field programs. or CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 50 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 50 Enjoy the compressed music sources in enhanced sound 52 Edit parameters of sound field programs 76 Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at night 53 Use headphones 41 Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 51 Select a decoder to play back sources with 80 Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 43 STEREO PROGRAM Front panel 5 Remote control Currently selected sound field program category MOVIE Sci-Fi Currently selected sound field program 39 En BASIC OPERATION y See page 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK AUTO Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (Audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend setting Audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default Audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 99). 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. INPUT Note PHONO V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT or DTV Front panel 2 VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Remote control Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or AUDIO SEL on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting. AUDIO SELECT AUDIO SEL or Available input sources V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD A.SEL: MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM AUTO Currently selected Audio input jack select setting 40 En This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an Audio input jack select setting when the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 94). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 26) as the input source. Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. Rotate the input selector on the front panel to select MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 96). y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 49) Note Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40), only the signals input at FRONT jacks are output from the connected headphones. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. Muting the audio output Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. MUTE y • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 93). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. 41 En BASIC OPERATION y 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. AMP SET MENU MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO SRCH MODE TV p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2 Signal format FORMAT Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling frequency SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. SET MENU SOURCE ■ Audio information Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. Channel CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Note “---” appears when there is no source channel available. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. Bit rate BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. Note A-E/CAT. “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to navigate the cursor in the OSD and press l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. PRESET/CH Dialogue normalization level DIALOG The dialogue normalization level preset to the current input Dolby Digital and DTS signal. Flag FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. PRESET/CH ■ Video information ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Navigating the cursor 4 Selecting the audio or video information Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 42 En HDMI Signal Type HDMI SIGNAL Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI Resolution HDMI RES. Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. Analog Resolution ANALOG RES. Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the video jacks of this unit. HDMI Error HDMI ERROR Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 127 for details. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK Playing video sources in the background of an audio source 3 You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. SLEEP 120min. SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90min. SLEEP 30min. SLEEP 60min. XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. Audio sources Video sources 120min. SLEEP y Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 96). Flashes Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 29). 1 Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. STRAIGHT Analog SLEEP Lights up ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV 2 VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. See page 54 for details about tuning instructions. SLEEP OFF Disappears The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 43 En BASIC OPERATION SLEEP 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y • When you set the “DECODER MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” to “AUTO”, this unit selects the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. • The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. • The YAMAHA HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • You can change sound field parameters. See page 76 for details. Selecting sound field programs Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40). • When you play back DSD sources with any sound field program, this unit converts the DSD signals to PCM signals and then applies the selected program. • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. ■ Front panel operations ■ Remote control operations (U.S.A. model) AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE PURE DIRECT – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV VOLUME LEVEL AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO AUDIO ENTER OPTICAL A-E/CAT. PARAMETER PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX ON OFF STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY MASTER PROGRAM selector CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 9 0 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT Sound field program selector buttons (U.S.A. model) Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 44 En Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions y Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. Remote control button Category of the program Name of the program Created sound fields (see page 11) CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP MOVIE 4 MOVIE Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DSP LEVEL P.INIT. DLY P.ROOM SIZE S.INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG. LIFT Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 77) ■ For music audio sources For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 50), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49) or surround decode mode (see page 80). CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich HiFi DSP This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Hall in Amsterdam HiFi DSP This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Church in Freiburg HiFi DSP This program creates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT 45 En BASIC OPERATION y 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL Chamber HiFi DSP This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 LIVENESS REV.TIME LIVE/CLUB REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT Village Vanguard HiFi DSP A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located at the corner of the room. This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALG.LIFT Warehouse Loft HiFi DSP This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT Cellar Club HiFi DSP This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALG.LIFT The Roxy Theatre HiFi DSP The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT The Bottom Line HiFi DSP This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT ■ For various sources Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY 46 En P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Action Game This sound field has been optimized for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Roleplaying Game This sound field has been optimized for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT ■ For visual sources of music Note LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video HiFi DSP This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music, The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 82 for details. Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. MOVIE 4 MOVIE Standard This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. DSP LEVEL S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE S. LIVENESS SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE SB LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT 47 En BASIC OPERATION The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS MOVIE MOVIE 4 Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY MOVIE Sci-Fi MOVIE 4 SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS REV.TIME REV. LEVEL REV.DELAY DIALG.LIFT ■ Stereo playback STEREO 5 STEREO 2ch STEREO Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 51 for details. DIRECT STEREO 5 STEREO 7ch STEREO HiFi DSP Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. CT LEVEL SL LEVEL 48 En SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Enjoying unprocessed input sources Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 88), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 45). When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Note Press STRAIGHT on the front panel (or on the remote control) to select “STRAIGHT”. Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 88) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the Pure Direct (see page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 51) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49). SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 45). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 51) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49). STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT STRAIGHT Format Dolby Digital Description Standard processing for Dolby Digital sources. DTS Standard processing for DTS sources. When the input source is DTS ES Discrete or DTS ES Matrix format, the respective indicator appears in the front panel display. DSD Plays back DSD (Direct Stream Digital) sources. PCM Plays back PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) sources. Plays back multi-channel PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) sources. MPCM Analog Plays back analog sources. ■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode Press STRAIGHT on the remote control so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT 49 En BASIC OPERATION ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) STRAIGHT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Adjusting the tonal quality Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front L/R, center, presence L/R speaker channels and the subwoofer channel. 1 Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or on the remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode. The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display automatically dims. Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS) TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT or PURE DIRECT 2 Front panel Remote control Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Notes • When you play back the multi-channel PCM sources (less than 192 kHz), this unit downmixes the multi-channel signals according to the “SPEAKER SET” in “BASIC MENU” (see page 87). • When the component connected to the HDMI IN jacks is selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to “AUTO” or “HDMI”, this unit does not turn off the video circuitry in the Pure Direct mode. • When you set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”, “HDMI” or “COAX/OPT” (see page 40) and play back the Dolby Digital, DTS or multi channel PCM sources, this unit activates the corresponding decoder. • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker level settings) – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. 50 En PROGRAM ■ Bypassing the tone control circuitry Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS and cancel the tone control. TONE CONTROL Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R, center, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 90). 1 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. 1 Set the operation mode to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. AMP STEREO SOURCE 5 TV AMP LEVEL SOURCE TITLE BAND TV Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker CENTER Center speaker FRONT R Front right speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back right speaker SB R Surround back left speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SWFR Subwoofer PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker y • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 87). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. 2 Press PARAMETER and then l / h to set the “DIRECT” parameter. PRESET/CH PARAMETER y • Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing k / n. • Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89). 2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. DISPLAY ENTER A-E/CAT. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 50). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. y • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: –“LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87). –“FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 87). • Press PARAMETER again to exit from the parameter setting mode. 51 En BASIC OPERATION Display 2ch Stereo 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bit rate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes • When you play back DSD sources or PCM sources whose sampling frequencies are higher than 48 kHz, this unit samples them down to 48 kHz or lower and applies the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 7ch Enhancer, Off • Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “7ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. • Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. Note When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously selected sound field program. ■ Changing the parameter of the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Press PARAMETER and then l / h on the remote control to select the desired effect level. The following display is shown in the OSD. PRESET/CH PARAMETER DISPLAY ENTER A-E/CAT. Press ENHANCER on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following display is shown in the OSD and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Stereo . LOW [HIGH AMP ENHANCER or SOURCE ENHANCER ENT TV Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. y Press PARAMETER to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter display. ENHANCER MUSICENHANCER 2chEnhancer 52 En Lights up Note Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Press NIGHT on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control) repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: –when the Pure Direct mode (see page 50) is selected. –when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41). –when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. AMP NIGHT SOURCE or NIGHT + 10 TV BASIC OPERATION Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 53 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. FM/AM controls and functions ■ Front panel functions 1 2 AUDIO SELECT ■ Remote control functions 3 45 6 7 TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM PHONO 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD VCR 1 1 EDIT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES CD-R 2 3 STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 5 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO 7 OPTICAL 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 VIDEO AUX 1 INPUT selector Selects “TUNER” as the input source. + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME 2 3 – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 58). 5 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 55). 6 MEMORY Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 57). 7 TUNING MODE Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 55). 3 5 VOLUME PRESET A/B/C/D/E MUTE A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY 5 EFFECT XM MEMORY 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 57). • Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 56). Set to SOURCE PURE DIRECT A-E/CAT. RETURN 4 TV AUDIO ENTER CLASSICAL 2 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) (see page 57). 8 AMP (U.S.A. model) 54 En CD SELECT ZONE 2 SOURCE PROGRAM 1 4 ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO TUNER DTV DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT POWER XM DTV TUNING MODE TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT PRESET ID1 ID2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER MOVIE STEREO PRESET/CH ALL (U.S.A. model) 1 TUNER Selects “TUNER” as the input source. This unit is turned into the last selected station. 2 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 55). This unit is turned into the last selected AM or FM station. 3 PRESET/CH k / n Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (on page 58). 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations (see page 59). 5 A-E/CAT. l / h, A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 57). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE DISPLAY (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL AFM88.9MHz VIDEO AUX AUTO ON OFF MASTER 1 1 No colon (:) 4 32 3 Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. EDIT SEARCH MODE 4 Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. FM/AM FM or AM PRESET/TUNING/CH AFM88.9MHz TUNED Lights up 55 En BASIC OPERATION PRESET/ TUNING INPUT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE Note DISPLAY Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. (U.S.A. model) AFM88.9MHz PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS No colon (:) MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. MASTER 1 4 32 3 PRESET/ TUNING EDIT 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. SEARCH MODE 4 INPUT Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/TUNING/CH Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 56 En or AM 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. MEMORY (U.S.A. model) MAN'L/AUTO FM PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL A1:FM88.9MHz VIDEO AUX AUTO MEMORY ON OFF MASTER 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. Front panel Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y INPUT 2 Flashes FM • You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/ TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. • You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing and holding MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 58. 57 En BASIC OPERATION 1 Flashes 2 3 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Manual preset tuning 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING/CH PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER A1:FM88.9MHz 3 4 2,5 Preset station number 1 2 MEMORY Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 55 and 56 for tuning instructions. Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. 5 Flashes Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A1:FM88.9MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY A :FM88.9MHz Preset station Colon (:) group 58 En Notes MEMORY Flashes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Selecting preset stations 2 You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. (U.S.A. model) Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING TUNING MODE MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO PRESET/TUNING/CH OPTICAL or VIDEO AUX PHONES ENTER ON OFF MASTER A-E/CAT. 1 2 Front panel Remote control AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 1,2 PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 1 BASIC OPERATION LEVEL TV PURE DIRECT A1:FM88.9MHz AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY (U.S.A. model) y When performing this operation with the remote control, set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY Front panel or PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE TV ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control 59 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Exchanging preset stations 3 You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59. (U.S.A. model) A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PURE DIRECT CATEGORY VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER A5:FM88.9MHz MEMORY 3 3 2,4 1 2 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59. Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes 4 Flashes Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE EDIT E1:FM88.9MHz Flashes 60 En MEMORY Flashes E1-A5 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio is a satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada, broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 63. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. Notes Connecting the XM Passport System Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with XM Passport System. XM (U.S.A. model) ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)” (for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at “http:// www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM service only available in the 48 continuous United States and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) 61 En BASIC OPERATION • The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. • XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). • For information on obtaining the XM Passport System, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio controls and functions Note The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. ■ Front panel functions 1 ■ Remote control functions 2 AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E 3 4 PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING 56 MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM POWER POWER TV AV XM 1 POWER SLEEP 1 PHONO TUNER CD 1 MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 4 INPUT DTV CD CD-R 2 3 ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT DTV DISPLAY SEARCH MODE VCR 1 STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 5 4 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 EDIT CATEGORY POWER XM TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TUNING MODE STANDBY AUDIO SEL 7 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 8 9 ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO SELECT OPTICAL VIDEO AUX A/B/C/D/E + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE (U.S.A. model) LEVEL 1 INPUT selector Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category while staying in the All Channel Search mode. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 4 SEARCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 66). 5 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70). 6 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71). 62 En VOLUME PRESET AMP PHONES 2 3 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL 4 PRESET/CH TV LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT 5 6 7 8 7 2 0 A MUTE A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PRESET/CH ALL PRESET ID1 ID2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER 8 B C 9 REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) 1 XM Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 PRESET/CH k / n (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 3 XM MEMORY Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70). 4 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. 5 Operation mode selector Set to SOURCE when you operate the XM Satellite Radio tuning function. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 63 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 6 SRCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 66). 7 A-E/CAT. l / h (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 8 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71). Activating XM Satellite Radio To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit card handy for signing up. For residents in the United States URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/ Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346) For residents in Canada URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/ activation.jsp Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677) BASIC OPERATION 9 ENT Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct Number Access mode (see page 69). 0 ALL Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 66). A NUMBER Press and hold before you press the input selector or numeric buttons to switch the function to entering numbers. B PRESET Selects the Preset Search Mode (see page 68). C CAT. Selects the Category Search mode (see page 67). 63 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 64 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. model) 2 PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level and adjust the orientation of XM Passport System for a better percentage of the reception level. EDIT CATEGORY INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS y MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 100). VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER 1 3 Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM Passport System” on page 61 and check the connection. • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 100) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME 1 SOURCE 1 POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH LEVEL 3 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE TV PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY (U.S.A. model) 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display. 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select channel “0”. PRESET/CH PRESET/TUNING/CH or INPUT ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel Note Front panel You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode (see page 66) is not selected. or AMP 4 XM SOURCE TV Remote control 64 En DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. ID:_____________________________________ Lights up V-AUX Remote control CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 65 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Basic XM Satellite Radio operations 1 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL INPUT VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER INPUT selector XM button POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT POWER SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Front panel or AMP XM SOURCE DTV VCR 1 TV SELECT Remote control AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV Set to SOURCE Lights up (U.S.A. model) V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM [001] Preview y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Note The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on page 66. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on page 67. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 68. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 69. y • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 80). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 70). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71). 65 En BASIC OPERATION STANDBY AUDIO SEL 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 66 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ All Channel Search mode 2 (U.S.A. model) Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS A/B/C/D/E MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO or OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ENTER CATEGORY ON OFF A-E/CAT. MASTER 2 Front panel 3 1 3 TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE MUTE SET MENU PURE DIRECT MENU SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY 1 STRAIGHT 2,3 DISPLAY Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. EFFECT PRESET/CH (U.S.A. model) 1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. or or SEARCH MODE Remote control SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Front panel ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel PRESET/ TUNING EDIT Remote control ALL CH SEARCH 66 En PRESET/TUNING/CH y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 67 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode (U.S.A. model) 2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS A/B/C/D/E MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO or OPTICAL ENTER VIDEO AUX PHONES CATEGORY ON OFF MASTER A-E/CAT. 2 Front panel 3 1 3 PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT 1 2,3 DISPLAY RETURN XM MEMORY EFFECT Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SET MENU or PRESET/TUNING/CH or ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel Remote control MENU SEARCH MODE Front panel BASIC OPERATION 1 SRCH MODE Remote control y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control). CAT SEARCH 67 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 68 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 70. 2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). y PRESET/CH The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “[001] Preview”. A/B/C/D/E or (U.S.A. model) ENTER CATEGORY A-E/CAT. PURE DIRECT Front panel VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Remote control NIGHT EDIT INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO 3 OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER 2 3 1 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). PRESET/CH LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY PRESET/TUNING/CH or AUDIO ENTER 1 STRAIGHT 2,3 ENTER A-E/CAT. DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) Front panel 1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. PRESET/ TUNING SET MENU EDIT or SEARCH MODE MENU SRCH MODE Front panel Remote control PRESET SEARCH 68 En Remote control y You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 69 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Direct Number Access mode LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU PURE DIRECT MENU 1 SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT MOVIE 2 Press the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. 2 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 (U.S.A. model) 1 The display changes as follows. Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. <XM> --1 SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Remote control BASIC OPERATION <XM> -12 ALL CH SEARCH or <XM>123 CAT SEARCH y • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons on the remote control and then press ENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. 69 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 70 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels 2 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 68. Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel RETURN XM MEMORY Remote control (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT MEMORY VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT Flashes DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON Note OFF MASTER 3 4 TV MUTE LEVEL 3,4 2,5 TV INPUT PRESET/CH 2,5 MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 1 You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 65 for details. 3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E or CATEGORY ENTER A-E/CAT. [043] XMU Front panel Remote control Currently selected channel number C [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel group 70 En MEMORY Flashes 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 71 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH PURE DIRECT PRESET/TUNING/CH or ENTER VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A-E/CAT. A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF Front panel Remote control MASTER DISPLAY C5 [043] XMU MEMORY PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER Flashes Currently selected preset channel number RETURN XM MEMORY BASIC OPERATION LEVEL STRAIGHT DISPLAY DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel RETURN XM MEMORY Remote control Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 122 for appropriate remedies. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. TUNING MODE Channel number / name DISPLAY C5: [043] XMU Front panel or Channel category PARAMETER Colon (:) DISPLAY Artist name / Song title Note Remote control Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. 71 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 72 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING When the channel number / name is displayed: [043] XMU ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. TUNING MODE When the channel category is displayed: PARAMETER or DISPLAY DISPLAY Front panel Remote control <CAT>Rock XM INFORMATION When the artist name / song title is displayed: Coldplay / Spe p y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. Note If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as described above. 72 En p ALL CH SEARCH XM :043 CHAN :XMU CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE :Speed of sound .( Coldplay / Spe ) []/[]:CHANNEL [p]/[[]:CATEGORY y • To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on the remote control). • You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD by using the “ON SCREEN” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD. • The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you change the XM Satellite Radio channel. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio information screen is being hold. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 73 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING IPOD USING iPod Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 27), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 52). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y Controlling iPod You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. 73 En BASIC OPERATION • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 102. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 128. • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHRG” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (on page 100). • While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 10) appears in the front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 74 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING iPod 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. AMP PARAMETER SOURCE DISPLAY TV Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. Note iPod Top Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings 2 When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. > > > > > > > Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to navigate the iPod menu and then press ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Note When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. 1 ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat 74 En All 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 75 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. (U.S.A. model) 2 PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the source component you want to record from. NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL INPUT VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER PHONO or 2 DTV POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO 2 TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Front panel Turn on all the connected components. VCR 1 CD MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Remote control 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. (U.S.A. model) 1 TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT 75 En BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 50), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 90) and the sound field programs (see page 45) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 76 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Changing sound field parameter settings 3 You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. Press one of the sound field program selector buttons repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO 5 Note You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 98). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 4 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT 4 SET MENU PURE DIRECT TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN 2,5 PRESET/CH PRESET/CH EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL 3 2 MUTE PRESET/CH LEVEL TV Press k / n to select the desired sound field parameter and then l / h to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press h to increase the value. • Press l to decrease the value. LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. (U.S.A. model) 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press PARAMETER on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. AMP PARAMETER SOURCE DISPLAY TV Sound field program category MOVIE y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 77. • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold l / h to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 99). • To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program, press n repeatedly to select “PARAM. INIT” and then press h repeatedly. Sci-fi Cursor . < P R O L O G I C > DSPLEVEL;;;+0dB P.INIT.DLY;;16ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;16ms 5 Press PARAMETER to turn off the sound field parameter display. PARAMETER DISPLAY Sound field parameters 76 En Sound field parameter values 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 77 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 76 for details. Sound field parameter DSP LEVEL Features DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound source ADVANCED OPERATION Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms 77 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 78 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 78 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 79 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s REV.DELAY 60 dB Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Control range: 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control range: 0 to 100% Level REV.LEVEL REV.TIME Source sound REV. LEVEL Time 79 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 80 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Sound field parameter DIALG.LIFT Features Dialog lift. Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2ch Stereo DIRECT 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 50). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 87). 7ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% Selecting decoders 2 ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SUR. DECODE on the remote control to select the surround decode mode. AMP SOURCE TV 80 En SUR. DECODE 6 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. SELECT 7 y • You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control. • You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press PARAMETER and then k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the selected parameter by pressing l / h repeatedly on the remote control. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 81 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ■ Decoder descriptions Remote control button Category of the program SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE Name of the program PLIIxMusic PLIIMusic Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 77) SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PL II Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Music PL II Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” PANORAMA SUR.DECODE 6 DIMENSION SURROUND DECODE ADVANCED OPERATION is set to “NONE” (see page 89). CENTER WIDTH PLIIx Game PL II Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE Neo: 6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. C. IMAGE SUR.DECODE 6 neural sur. SURROUND DECODE (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural Surround processing for any sources. The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surroundincompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. y When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program. 81 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 82 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 ■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). See page 47 for details about MOVIE sound field program. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press MOVIE on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired MOVIE sound field programs. AMP MOVIE SOURCE 4 TV 2 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the desired decoder used with the selected sound field program. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control. 82 En Available decoders Decoder PRO LOGIC PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Neo:6 Cinema Functions Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). DTS processing for movie sources 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 83 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1channel playback. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 8 TV 2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder while the name of the decoder is displayed. PRESET/CH ENTER Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions PLIIxMovie q D+PLIIx Movie DTS+PLIIx Movie MPCM+PLIIx Movie DSD+PLIIx Movie Plays back multi-channel sources in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic q D+PLIIx Music DTS+PLIIx Music MPCM+PLIIx Music DSD+PLIIx Music Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. DTS ES DTS 96/24 ES Plays back DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. DOLBY D EX DTS+DOLBY EX MPCM+DOLBY EX DSD+DOLBY EX Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. A-E/CAT. Notes • “PLIIx Movie” is available only when “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) is set to “SMLx2” or “LRGx2”. • Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88) or “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 51) or Pure Direct (see page 50) mode is selected. • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). 83 En ADVANCED OPERATION Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/7.1 channels. Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 84 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU Use this menu to manually adjust basic system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency. 87 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 90 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 90 D)TEST TONE Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SPEAKER LEVEL and SP DISTANCE setting. 91 Sound menu 2 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 91 B)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 92 C)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 92 D)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 93 E)HDMI SET Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals. 93 84 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 85 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Input menu 3 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 94 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 95 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 96 D)DECODER MODE Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 96 E)MULTI CH SET Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer, and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 96 Option menu 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 97 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 98 C)AUDIO SELECT Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 99 D)DECODER MODE Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode selected in INPUT MENU. 99 E)PARAM.INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 99 F)ZONE SET Adjusts the Zone 2 and Zone 3 parameters. 99 G)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level of XM Passport System. 100 H)DOCK SET Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode. 100 Note The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models. ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 42). 85 En ADVANCED OPERATION A)DISPLAY SET 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 86 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Using SET MENU 2 Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. PRESET/CH SET MENU AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE 2-6 ENTER A-E/CAT. MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AUDIO ENTER 1,7 A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT 9 0 3 MOVIE (U.S.A. model) Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH y ENTER ;MANUAL SETUP p .1BASICMENU 2SOUNDMENU 3INPUTMENU 4OPTIONMENU []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter A-E/CAT. p • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press PARAMETER during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press RETURN or l to return to the previous menu level. y You can also press h to enter the selected menu item. Note You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night listening mode (see page 53). 1 []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PURE DIRECT p TV INPUT PRESET/CH LEVEL 1 p TV MUTE TV ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP . ;SIGNAL INFO Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 4 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH AMP MENU A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. SRCH MODE TV SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO 2 SOUND MENU 1/2 2 SOUND MENU 2/2 . E)HDMI SET p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)EQUALIZER B)LFE LEVEL C)DYNAMIC RANGE D)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 86 En ENTER ENTER SET MENU SOURCE 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 87 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 5 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “LFE LEVEL” is selected. 1 BASIC MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings. 2 BASIC MENU PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. p p . A)SPEAKERSET B)SPLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)TESTTONE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter A-E/CAT. ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. B)LFE LEVEL y .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p • If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. • When the diameter of the woofer section of the speaker unit is larger than 16 cm (6.5 in), set the correspondent speaker setting parameter to “LARGE” (or “LRG”). 6 p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Press k / n to select the desired parameter and then l / h to change the parameter settings. • Press h to increase the value. • Press l to decrease the value. PRESET/CH LFE/BASS OUT PRESET/CH ENTER [ SWFRFRONTBOTH A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “FRONT” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 87). • Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 87). 87 En ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER A-E/CAT. 7 LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 88 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE FRONT SP SMALLLARGE [ • Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87). • Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. Notes • When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. • When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the value to “LARGE” automatically. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP NONESMLLRG [ • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. 88 En Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP NONESMLLRG [ • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 49) and “SUR. B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. • Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 89 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Surround back speakers SB L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SB L/R SP SMLx1 [ SMLx2 Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers connected to this unit. Choices: NONE, YES CROSS OVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE NORMALREVERSE [ • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRNS, SB PRESENCE SP PRIORITY NONEYES [ PRNS • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence speakers. • Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers and want to use them. SB [ • Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from the surround speakers. • Select “SB” to use the surround back speakers when surround back channel signals are detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals are output from the front speakers. 89 En ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround back speakers. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “SMLx1” (small x 1) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “SMLx2” (small x 2) if you have two small surround back speakers that do not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRGx1” (large x 1) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “LRGx2” (large x 2) if you have two large surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left and right speakers. Bass cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 90 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87). Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: FR. L/FR. R/SWFR/PR. L/PR. R: 0 dB CENT./SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB B)SP LEVEL -__________+ .FR.L;;;;;;;;;; FR.R;;;;;;;;;; CENT.;;;;;;;;;; ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. C)SP DISTANCE p p []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust • Select “FR. L” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “FR. R” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “CENT.” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB L” to adjust the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Select “SB R” to adjust the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. • Select “PR. L” to adjust the balance of the presence left speaker. • Select “PR. R” to adjust the balance of the presence right speaker. Notes • “CENT.”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”, “PR. L” and “PR. R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SB.L/R SP” (see page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE” respectively. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SB.L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89). 90 En p p . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONTL;;;10.0ft FRONTR;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;8.5ft []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/ PRNS R: 3.00m (10.0ft) CENTER: 2.60m (8.5ft) SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40m (8.0ft) • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. • Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB L” to adjust the distance of the surround back left speaker. • Select “SB R” to adjust the distance of the surround back right speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. • Select “PRNS L” to adjust the distance of the presence left speaker. • Select “PRNS R” to adjust the distance of the presence right speaker. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 91 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 2 SOUND MENU Notes • “CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”, “PRNS L” and “PRNS R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE” respectively. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/ R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89). ■ Test tone D)TEST TONE 2 SOUND MENU 1/2 2 SOUND MENU 2/2 . E)HDMI SET p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)EQUALIZER B)LFE LEVEL C)DYNAMIC RANGE D)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings. Choices: ON, OFF Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). D)TEST TONE ■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER TEST TONE;;;;OFF Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the graphic equalizer. []/[]:Select ) ) Equalizer select SELECT Use this feature to select the type of equalizer. Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF y If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. A)EQUALIZER SELECT;;;;;;;GEQ ) ) []/[]:Adjust [ENTER]:Enter Notes • Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32). • Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speaker matches. Press ENTER to display the graphic equalizer screen. • Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature. Note You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 32). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting. 91 En ADVANCED OPERATION • This function is automatically turned off if you exit “BASIC MENU”. • If you select “ON” and enter the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL” or “SP DISTANCE” menu, the test tone is output from the selected speakers. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 92 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Graphic equalizer GEQ Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R, surround back, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer with that of the front L/R speakers. You can adjust 7 frequency bands (63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz). Choices: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB A)EQUALIZER .CHANNEL;;FRONTL -______+ 63Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 160Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 400Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB ■ Low-frequency effect level B)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB B)LFE LEVEL p .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ p Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. Note The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is selected in “SELECT”. Test tone TEST TONE A)EQUALIZER CHANNEL;;FRONTL -______+ 16kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB p p . TESTTONE;;;;OFF []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while listening to a test tone. To select “TEST TONE”, press n repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the selected speakers. p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ y Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. ■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. C)DYNAMIC RANGE .SP:MINSTDMAX [ HP:MINSTDMAX [ p p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Select p [ Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. 92 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 93 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Audio settings D)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. ■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. E)HDMI SET D)AUDIO SET SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V1700 []/[]:Adjust p [ p p . MUTE TYPE;;;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO LE>E []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 41). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms Note The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. 93 En ADVANCED OPERATION Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 50). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” if you want the signals to bypass the tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want the signals to bypass the tone control circuitry. Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choices: RX-V1700, OTHER • Select “RX-V1700” to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 94 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 3 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. 3 INPUT MENU 1/2 3 INPUT MENU 2/2 . E)MULTI CH SET p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p . A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1, 2 and 3 COAXIAL IN Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, MULTI CH (2) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, MULTI CH (3) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, MULTI CH ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). y The input source name in parentheses indicates the default assigned input source. For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V IN Choices: [A] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX [B] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX [C] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX COAXIALIN .(1);;;;; CD ( CD ) (2);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (3);;;;;DVR/VCR2 (DVR/VCR2) For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 4, 5, 6 and 7 OPTICAL IN Choices: (4) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH (5) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH (6) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH (7) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH OPTICALIN1/2 CMPNT-VINPUT .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV (DTV) [C];;;;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) 94 En OPTICALIN2/2 .(4);;;;;CD (CD) (5);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (6);;;;;DTV (DTV) .(7);;;;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 95 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks 8 and 9 OPTICAL OUT Choices: (8) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX (9) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX 1 Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. XM PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 OPTICALOUT .(8);;;;;MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE ) (9);;;;;;;CD-R (CD-R) 2 Press l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. PRESET/CH Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. ENTER A-E/CAT. 3 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and then press l / h to move to the next space. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER HDMI IN ADVANCED OPERATION For HDMI IN jacks 1and 2 HDMI IN Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX [IN2] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. .[IN1];;; DVD ( DVD ) [IN2];;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space. ■ Input rename B) INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. C)INPUTRENAME 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. DVD-> DVD ________ p p [p]/[[]:Position []/[]:Chara. SET MENU y MENU SRCH MODE • This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. • You can also change the name of the input source that appears in the display window on the remote control. Refer to “Changing source names in the display window” on page 106”. 95 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 96 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: XM, TUNER, PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Multi channel input Setup E)MULTI CH SET Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. E)MULTI CH SET . BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUTCH;;;;;6CH C)VOLUME TRIM This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT jacks. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.). Choices: AUTO, DTS D)DECODER MODE . p p CD ;;;;AUTO DVD ;;;;AUTO DTV ;;;;AUTO CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ p p p y p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ XM;;;0.0dB TUNER;;;0.0dB PHONO;;;0.0dB CD;;;0.0dB []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, LAST, OFF • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. • Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video source in the background. Input channels INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6CH, 8CH • Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals. • Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals. Note • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. If “ZONE2 AMP” is set to “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” or “BOTH” (see page 100), no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8CH”. In this case, select “6CH” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. Front input FRONT E)MULTI CH SET BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUTCH;;;;;8CH .FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD p p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ If you selected 8ch in “INPUT CH”, you can select the analog jacks at which the front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX Note “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. 96 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 97 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. 4 OPTION MENU 1/2 4 OPTION MENU 2/2 p p . E)PARAM. INI F)ZONE SET G)XM RADIO SET H)DOCKSET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)DECODER MODE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. • Select “OFF” not to display a gray background in your video monitor. Notes ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET Note Use the “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (except “DIMMER”, “SHORT MESSAGE”, “ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL”) to the factory presets (see page 119). A)DISPLAYSET p p .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;;AUTO VCONV.;;;;;;;;ON []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press l to raise the position of the OSD. • Press h to lower the position of the OSD. Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and component video signals interchangeably and upconvert composite and S-video and component video signals to HDMI video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Set “V CONV.” to “ON” to display the sound field parameter display and short message display. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “V CONV.” to “OFF”. • When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals even if you set “V CONV.” to “ON”. 97 En ADVANCED OPERATION Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press h to make the front panel display brighter. • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 98 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Component interlace/progressive up-conversion CMPNT I/P Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to activate the analog interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select “OFF” to deactivate the analog interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. Notes • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. • If your video monitor does not support analog video signals with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be displayed on your video monitor when “CMPNT I/P” is set to “ON”. Use “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the “CMPNT I/P” parameter to the factory preset setting (see page 119). HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion HDMI I/P Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the HDMI OUT jack. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to activate the HDMI interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select “OFF” to deactivate the HDMI interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. Note The short message display does not appear in the following cases: – when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input – When HDMI video signals are input On-screen display time ON SCREEN Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the XM Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ALWAYS, 10SEC, 30SEC • Select “ALWAYS” to display the OSD unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10SEC” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30SEC” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “XM” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORYGUARD Notes • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. • When analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen. Short message display SHORT MESSAGE Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display function. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to activate the short message display function. The contents of the front panel display appear at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. • Select “OFF” to deactivate the short message display function. 98 En OFFON [ []/[]:Adjust p [ • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – DSP sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 99 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST C)AUDIO SELECT [AUTO LAST [p]/[[]:Adjust • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source. ■ Parameter initialization E)PARAM.INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO, SURROUND DECODE E)PARAM.INI CLASSICAL *LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAINMENT *MOVIE STEREO SURROUNDDECODE Press DSP key Note Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button on the remote control. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST [AUTO LAST • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 98). ■ Zone set F)ZONE SET [p]/[[]:Adjust F)ZONE SET p Note Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button on the remote control. p • Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. . ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT ZONE3 AMP;;;;EXT []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR, FIX • Select “VAR” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote control. • Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. 99 En ADVANCED OPERATION D)DECODER MODE Notes 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 100 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 and/or ZONE 3 speakers are amplified. Choices: EXT, [SP1], [SP2], BOTH • Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “[SP1]” to use the internal surround back amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “[SP2]” to use the internal surround amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “BOTH” to use the internal surround and surround back amplifiers of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to both the SP1 and the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. Notes • When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu, “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” and “BOTH” cannot be selected. • When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE2 AMP”, only “EXT” can be selected for “ZONE3 AMP”. • When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE3 AMP”, only “EXT” can be selected for “ZONE2 AMP”. • When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “[SP1]” or “[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from the surround back speakers. • When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “BOTH” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers in the main zone. • When both “ZONE2 AMP” and “ZONE3 AMP” are set to “[SP1]” or “[SP2]” and Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers in the main zone. • When you use internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3, some surround field programs may not work in the same way as when you do not use the internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3. 100 En ■ XM Radio setting G)XM RADIO SET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) G)XM RADIO SET .XM ANTENNA;;NONE XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA Use this feature to check the current reception level of the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit (see page 61). For the best reception, orient the XM Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% Notes • “NONE” is displayed if the XM Passport System is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 61). • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. ■ Dock set H)DOCK SET H)DOCK SET .STANDBYCHRG;AUTO []/[]:Select ) ) [ENTER]:Return Charge on standby STANDBY CHRG Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 73). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. • Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 101 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 103). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit (see page 6). Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 103). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV. POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD *1 *1 POWER POWER TV AV PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV POWER STANDBY XM VCR 1 AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD SELECT SELECT AMP AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – LEVEL – – TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH MENU SRCH MODE *1 TV SET MENU TITLE BAND PURE DIRECT *1 LEVEL TV – TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY PARAMETER *1 STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT 9 0 + 10 ENT *2 *2 DISC SKIP DISC SKIP ON MOVIE REC REC OFF ADVANCED OPERATION A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. MACRO LEARN CLEAR OFF RENAME (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 – – TV MUTE AUDIO ENTER *2 SOURCE SOURCE TV MUTE *2 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to AMP. ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 102. 101 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 102 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 103). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button or . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD MULTI CH IN 3 4 5 LEVEL DTV VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 6 SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 8 9 PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT 5 6 0 9 0 EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT PRESET/CH TITLE BAND MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT A SELECT 2 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 7 REC DISC SKIP SOURCE y The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 14 different components. DVD player/ DVD recorder 1 2 3 4 AV POWER Power *1 ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) VCR Cable TV/ Satellite tuner TV LD player CD player MD recorder/ Tape deck CD recorder Tuner Power *1 Power *1 VCR power Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 *2 CH + TV channel up*3 Channel up CH – TV channel down*3 Channel down Channel down Channel down TITLE Title Title ENTER PRESET/CH k OFF TV Channel up Channel up iPod Title Title Band Menu enter Menu select Menu select Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) Up Down Subsequent menu Menu down Menu down Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) A-E/CAT. l Menu left Menu left Menu left Preset down (A to E) Previous menu A-E/CAT. h Menu right Menu right Menu right Preset up (A to E) Subsequent menu PRESET/CH n 5 6 7 8 9 0 A Direction A/B RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *2 VCR search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward*4 hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *2 VCR search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward*4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Direction back Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec Rec (recorder) VCR rec *2 VCR rec *2 Disc skip Rec Rec s Stop Stop VCR stop *2 VCR stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause VCR pause *2 VCR pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause (Play/Pause)*5 p Play Play VCR play *2 VCR play *2 Play Play Play Play (Play/Pause)*5 MENU Menu Menu Menu AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display Display Display Enter/recall Enter ENT Stop Play Previous menu Audio Enter Display Display Display Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your VCR only when you set the appropriate remote control code for VCR 1 (see page 103). *3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 102. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *5 Simple remote mode (see page 73) *2 102 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 103 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Selecting a component to be controlled You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window on the remote control. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. SELECT Remote control code default settings Input area ■ Controlling optional components (Option mode) XM “OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press SELECT n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display window on the remote control. Note You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See page 105 to program buttons operated within this component control area. Manufacturer Default code TUNER YAMAHA 2604 TUNER YAMAHA 2607 PHONO TV – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602 CD CD YAMAHA 2300 MULTI CH INPUT DVD YAMAHA 2100 V-AUX/ DOCK TUNER YAMAHA 2606 CBL/SAT CABLE – – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA 2500 CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400 DTV TV – – VCR 1 VCR – – DVR/VCR2 DVR YAMAHA 2807 DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100 Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select the input area you want to set up. XM AMP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD SOURCE V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TV DTV VCR 1 103 En ADVANCED OPERATION SELECT Library (component category) 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 104 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. 4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 MOVIE LEARN y • You can set a remote control code of a different type of component to an input area. Press l / h repeatedly to change the library (component category). Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner), L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR • If you want to setup for another input area, press the input selector button or , or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the input area. 5 y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or , or SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 2 through 5. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note 0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set. Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. 6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control. POWER or AV y If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 104 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 105 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming codes from other remote controls 2 TV AV POWER XM TUNER POWER PHONO SLEEP POWER CD-R MULTI CH IN STANDBY CD AUDIO SEL MD/TAPE AUDIO SEL Other remote control PURE DIRECT MENU 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) AUDIO ENTER XM (U.S.A. model) SRCH MODE BAND POWER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT STANDBY DVD AV DVR/VCR 2 POWER TV VCR 1 SET MENU TITLE POWER SELECT LEVEL PRESET/CH DTV You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each input area. Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. SLEEP A-E/CAT. PARAMETER PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 0 9 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT 3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the name of the selected input area (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. SELECT REC AMP + + + DISC SKIP SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME TV (U.S.A. model) LEARN Note 1 Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3. Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select an input area. XM AMP 4 PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window on the remote control. SOURCE V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TV DTV VCR 1 TV AV POWER TUNER POWER XM PHONO SLEEP POWER MULTI CH IN STANDBY CD AUDIO SEL DVD CD-R SELECT TV AMP SOURCE MD/TAPE + DVR/VCR 2 – VOLUME VCR 1 + DTV – CH V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT + PURE DIRECT AUDIO EFFECT STRAIGHT – MUTE SET MENU PARAMETER TV VOL TV INPUT MENU ENTER PRESET/CH SRCH MODE LEVEL TITLE TV MUTE BAND A-E/CAT. DISPLAY 4 RETURN XM MEMORY 8 MOVIE EXTD SUR. 3 ENTERTAIN SELECT 2 LIVE/CLUB SUR. DECODE ENT ENHANCER 7 + 10 NIGHT RENAME 1 STEREO 6 CLEAR CLASSICAL 0 LEARN 9 MACRO 5 ON REC DISC SKIP OFF (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) Note Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit. 105 En ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 106 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. TV POWER XM PHONO DTV You can change the name of the input source that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is useful when you have set an input area to control a different component. AV 1 POWER TUNER VCR 1 V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT SLEEP MULTI CH IN POWER CD DVD CD-R STANDBY MD/TAPE AUDIO SEL DVR/VCR 2 SELECT (U.S.A. model) Changing source names in the display window Other remote control Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select the input area you want to rename. The name of the selected input area appears in the display window. AMP XM SOURCE TV y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 5. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 PHONO or TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD AMP DTV VCR 1 SOURCE TV (U.S.A. model) Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. 106 En 2 Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RENAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from 2. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 107 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Macro programming features The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 109). ■ MACRO operations 4 Press h to move the cursor to the next position. Macro buttons PRESET/CH POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY (U.S.A. model) POWER REC XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD DISC SKIP PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT ENTER DTV VCR 1 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME A-E/CAT. MACRO ON/OFF y Press l to move the cursor to the previous position. 5 1 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON. OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR ADVANCED OPERATION Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. MACRO 2 Press the desired macro button. 3 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF when you finish to using the macro programming operation. y If you continuously want to rename another input area, press the input selector button or , or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5. 6 OFF Press RENAME again to exit the renaming mode. ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Notes Note “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. y • While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. Refer to “INPUT RENAME” on page 95. 107 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 108 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Default macro functions Pressing macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY POWER POWER — — (*1) (*2) POWER TV XM POWER XM — POWER — PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT — (*3) CBL/SAT POWER MD/TAPE (*1) MD/TAPE CD-R CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 — — (CD area) (*4) — — — (MD/TAPE area) (*4) (CD-R area) (*4) — (VCR 1 area) (*4) DVR/VCR 2 (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4) DVD DVD (DVD area) (*4) *1 You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component. *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 103), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see page 105) or set a remote control code (see page 103). 108 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 109 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Programming macro operations You can program your own macro and use the macro programming feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 3 Notes • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. 1 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. The following example is for programming the following procedure: Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD. Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER. Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP. Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window on the remote control. POWER POWER TV AV 2 XM AMP PHONO STANDBY TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT MCR 2: AV POWER POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD MCR 3: SLEEP 3 SOURCE DTV VCR 1 TV 1 or MCR 1: DVD (U.S.A. model) MACRO AMP Indicates the number of macro steps entered TV Note Flashes alternately so you can set the next step If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. STANDBY POWER XM PHONO Note To change the selected input area, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area. 4 Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or similar object when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV ADVANCED OPERATION SOURCE VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button simultaneously. (U.S.A. model) 109 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 110 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing configurations You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names and setup remote control ID. ■ Clearing function sets 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). SOURCE TV CLEAR or Notes • “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. AMP SOURCE TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. Press k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area) Clears all learned functions in the respective input area. The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector button to select the input area. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions of this unit. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros. RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 110 En Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. CLEAR AMP 2 3 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 111 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 3 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select the input area containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control, release the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. AMP XM SOURCE TV PHONO or TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV AMP VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) SOURCE 2 y (U.S.A. model) TV LEARN 4 Press LEARN again to exit. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button simultaneously. Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step2. 111 En ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the input area, then repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 112 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 2 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window on the remote control. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was successful. V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD AMP SOURCE TV OFF or ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME MACRO (U.S.A. model) AMP y SOURCE • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 2. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Press MACRO again to exit the macro programming mode. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. 112 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 113 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. y • You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit. • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. REMOTE REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT OUT YAMAHA component YAMAHA component This unit REMOTE IN To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select “EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 3 ZONE 2 Infrared emitter Main room (Main zone) REMOTE OUT Second room (Zone 2) Third room (Zone 3) REMOTE IN REMOTE IN Notes • Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3 VOL” are set to “FIX” (see page 99). • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 113 En ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Using external amplifiers 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 114 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “[SP1]” or “[SP2]” for “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100). If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both SP1 and SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “BOTH” for “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100). R + SP1 – PRESENCE – + L R SP2 L + R + SURROUND BACK/ – BI-AMP – + L SINGLE – Second room (Zone 2) Third room (Zone 3) This unit Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 You can select the zone you want to control by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. 2 Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. ZONE CONTROLS ■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3 Front panel operations 1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3. Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE ON/OFF ZONE 2 ZONE 3 No indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions. ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions. 114 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 115 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION y • You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS again. • The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on. 3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further operations. Remote control operations 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SELECT k repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window on the remote control. ■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 using the remote control POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work differently depending on the selected zone that appears in the display window on the remote control. • When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected , you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode simultaneously. Control mode Display window Turns on the main zone only or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 2 mode “ZONE 2” or “2;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 3 mode “ZONE 3” or “3;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode. “ALL” POWER: turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. STANDBY: sets the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. SELECT All mode TV Notes or 2 3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further operations. Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. Note The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is pressed. • “ALL” appears in the display window on the remote control only when SELECT n is pressed. ■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source of the selected zone. If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2: name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the selected input source” is displayed in the display window on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively. 115 En ADVANCED OPERATION Name of the selected input area Main zone mode AMP SOURCE POWER and STANDBY 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 116 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3 INPUT Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BALANCE” and then rotate PROGRAM on the front panel to adjust the balance of the front left and right speaker level of the selected zone. or TONE CONTROL XM AMP PHONO SOURCE TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD PROGRAM TV DTV VCR 1 (U.S.A. model) • Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER features in the selected zone. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on page 54. • Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features in the selected zone. For details about the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 61. ■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response (BASS) respectively. + Note TV VOL The selected input source is shared across all zones. – y AMP You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again. SOURCE BASS TV + CH ■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 – TREBLE Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the selected zone. VOLUME + or VOLUME – y Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone. Note When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3, VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3 VOL” is set to “VAR” in “ZONE SET” (see page 99). 116 En y You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 50. Note Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality of the corresponding zone (see page 115). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 117 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 31). • Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using ADVANCED SETUP 3 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 118 for a complete list of available parameters. NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER 1-2,5 PROGRAM 2,4 Currently selected parameter Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Currently selected parameter setting SPEAKER IMP. 8 MIN MASTER 2 4 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT STRAIGHT EFFECT While holding down 5 MASTER Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. MASTER y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 117 En ADVANCED OPERATION 1 3 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 118 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SPEAKER IMP. Speaker Front 8ΩMIN Impedance level The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back Front 6ΩMIN The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. RC AMP ID Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 104). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2002”. Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround back ■ User presets USER PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 130). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. ■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. Note We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases. 118 En WAKE ON RS232C Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode. Choices: YES, NO Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES [Other models]: NO • Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. • Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. ■ Remote control AMP ID Center Surround ■ Wake on RS-232C access Note You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 104). ■ Remote control TUNER ID RC TUNER ID Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 121). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2602”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2603”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 121). ■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 121). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “2604”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “2605”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library code for the remote control (see page 121). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 119 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP ■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-AMP function. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP function. Setting remote control ID When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. ■ Setting remote control AMP ID 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE or TV Note When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP connection (see page 17). AMP 2 ■ Video reset VIDEO RESET Use to initialize the parameter settings for “DISPLAY SET” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 97). Choices: YES, CANCEL SOURCE TV Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP” appears in the display window on the remote control. PRESET/CH Note LEARN ENTER The parameter setting for “DIMMER”, “SHORT MESSAGE”, “ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL” is not initialized (see page 97). ADVANCED OPERATION A-E/CAT. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window on the remote control. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 119 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 120 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP 4 ■ Setting remote control tuner ID or XM ID Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the input area you want to use. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MOVIE Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press TUNER or XM on the remote control to select the tuner or XM to change the remote control ID. AMP TUNER SOURCE 9 0 TV or or Remote control AMP codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP code for the input area you want to use. AMP XM SOURCE TV AMP library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control AMP ID 2001 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press l / h repeatedly until “L;TUN” and “TUNER”, or “L;TUN” and “XM” alternately appear in the display window on the remote control. Note PRESET/CH You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID (see page 118). LEARN ENTER A-E/CAT. 5 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. PRESET/CH ENTER 3 A-E/CAT. 6 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window on the remote control. Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. PRESET/CH LEARN ENTER A-E/CAT. 120 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 121 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP 4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the input area you want to use. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 MOVIE Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control tuner codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control tuner code for the input area you want to use. Tuner library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control tuner ID 2602 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2603 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Remote control XM codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control XM code for the input area you want to use. control setting) Function ADVANCED OPERATION XM library code (remote Remote control XM ID 2604 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2605 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 Note You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID or XM ID (see page 118). 121 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 122 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound 122 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 30 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 14 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 21-27 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 36 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 40 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 40 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 14 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 41 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 19 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and “HDMI” audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V1700” in “MANUAL SETUP”. 93 38, 41 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 123 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No picture Cause Remedy See page Set “V CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source components in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit. 97 “SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”. Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”. 98 “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”. Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”. 97 “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. Set “V CONV.” to “ON”. 97 The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Non-standard video signals are input. Short message displays do not appears in the video monitor The signals input at the HDMI IN1 or HDMI IN2 jack are being output at the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video signals are being input. The sound suddenly goes off. 30, 118 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 41 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 90 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 88 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 45 No sound from the presence speakers The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on. 49 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 38 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 88 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 49 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 87 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 87 The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. 123 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 124 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. Cause Remedy See page “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SB L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SB L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 88 “SB L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SB L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 89 Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 40 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 24 The volume level is low while a record is being played. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier. 24 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 24 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 98 124 En Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 22, 24 Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 125 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 14 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 28 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 56 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 56 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 56 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — 57, 58 125 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM Cause 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 126 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA The XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or do not work properly. Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock connections and orient for the best reception level. 61 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for the best reception level. 61 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. 67 / - - - <CAT> - - - 126 En No channels are available for the selected category. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 127 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Wrong distance or angle. See page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9 The operation mode selector is set incorrectly. Set the operation mode selector correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 103 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 103 The remote control code was not correctly set. The remote control does not learn new functions. Remedy Cause — The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 110 Remedy See page 104, 118 105 9 105 — Error message Cause DEVICE OVER The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP ERROR HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — 127 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ HDMI 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 128 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 27). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 27 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown type The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 27 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Connect MIC! Unplug HP! 128 En Cause Optimizer microphone is not connected. Headphones are connected. Remedy See page Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 Unplug the headphones. — 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 129 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING During AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 14 E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 14 E-3:NO PRNS. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 14 E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 14 Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-5:NOISY E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 14 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 32 Check the speaker connections and placement. 14 E-8:NO SIGNAL E-9:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 32 32 After AUTO SETUP Warning message W-1:OUT OF PHASE Cause Remedy See page Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 14 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 32 14 Notes • • • • If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. If warning “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made. If error “E-10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 129 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 130 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. (U.S.A. model) 3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “PRESET”. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONES VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER 1-2,5 1 3 2,4 USERPRESET Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. CANCEL 4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. MASTER STRAIGHT 2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT EFFECT USERPRESET While holding down RESET MASTER y Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. MASTER 130 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 131 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GLOSSARY GLOSSARY ■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Dolby Digital A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ Dialogue normalization Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. 131 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS programs. ■ Dolby Digital EX 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 132 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ HDMI Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with fullquality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. 132 En ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 133 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GLOSSARY ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 133 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 134 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION ■ Elements of a sound field ■ SILENT CINEMA What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 134 En ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Sound output from each speaker Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. For details about the sound output from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to “SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual. Note Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc. y Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speakers (see page 45). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 135 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 91), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 Original frequency characteristic 135 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Frequency 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 136 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 160/195/255/335 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 175 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 180 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ....................................................................................... 0.9 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 130 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.4 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................ 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz • Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 450 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 2.0 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Format (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ..................... NTSC [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL • Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) .................................................................................... 60 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω FM SECTION • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ........... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to OUT (REC) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .............. 60 dB/45 dB or more • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf) • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 0.2/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .................................................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response Stereo ............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m 136 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 137 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General and Asia model] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] .................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ....................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Asia, General and China models] ........ 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia and U.K. models] ..... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) [Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm (17.1 x 6.7 x 17.3 in) • Weight .................................................................. 17.0 kg (38.8 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime ADDITIONAL INFORMATION YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 137 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM L Front left speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker C Center speaker SR Surround right speaker PL Presence left speaker R Front right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PR Presence right speaker Speaker from which no sound is being output Speaker from which sound is being output *1 EX / PL x / : OFF *2 EX / PL x / : ON, PRIORITY: PRNS *3 EX / PL x / : ON, PRIORITY: SB Input source Program CLASSICAL Hall in Munich Hall in Vienna Hall in Amsterdam Church in Freiburg Chamber LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard Warehouse Loft Cellar Club The Roxy Theatre The Bottom Line ENTERTAINMENT Sports Action Game Roleplaying Game Music Video Recital/Opera MOVIE STANDARD 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL L SL SBL SBR PL (PRO LOGIC) L SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 2-channel audio (stereo) SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL APPENDIX-i SBL SBR SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR PL L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL R SR PR C SBL SBR PL R (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 R PR C PL R (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PR C PL R PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM Input source Program MOVIE STANDARD (PLII Movie) (PLIIx Movie) (Neo:6 Cinema) 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL PRIORITY: PRNS PL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PL PL PL PR C SBL SBR R SR PRIORITY: SB MOVIE Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure Drama Mono Movie PL L SL STEREO 2ch Stereo PR C SBL SBR PL L SL L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback STEREO 7ch Stereo PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL L SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R SR PR C R SR APPENDIX-ii 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM Input source Program SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL PRO LOGIC PL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS SURROUND DECODE PLII Movie PLII Music PLII Game PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Movie/Game PL L SL PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Movie/Music/Game PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Music SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PLIIx Music PLIIx Game PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Movie/Game PL L SL SBL SBR Music APPENDIX-iii PR C SBL SBR R SR PL R L SR SL Movie/Music/Game PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iv Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM Input source Program SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema Neo:6 Music 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL Cinema PL 2-channel audio (stereo) PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PL R L SR SL Cinema/Music PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Music SURROUND DECODE neural sur. PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS STRAIGHT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback PURE DIRECT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback APPENDIX-iv 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page v Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 APPENDIX-v CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS 0678 LG 0768 LIMIT 0795 MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702 MARANTZ 0566 MEMOREX 0858 MICO 0750 MICROSOFT 0549 MINTEK 0744 MITSUBISHI 0548 MUSTEK 0757 NESA 0744 ONKYO 0530 ORITRON 0678 PALSONIC 0699 PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389 PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER HITACHI PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER SHARP SONY TOSHIBA VICTOR YAMAHA 2815 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2812, 2813 2809, 2810, 2811 2803 2814 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vi Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2601 (TUNER ID1) 2602 (TUNER ID2) 2603 (XM ID1) 2604 (XM ID2) 2605 (iPod) 2606 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT ABSAT ALBA ALPHASTAR AMSTRAD ASTON ASTRO 1327 0150 0482 0799 0874 0169, 1156 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH PACE 1127 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 APPENDIX-vi 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 APPENDIX-vii GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page viii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2903, 2904 (projector) YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE 0099 CINERAL 0305 CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305 COLT 0099 COMBITECH 0379 CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0099 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 APPENDIX-viii 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ix Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 APPENDIX-ix TELEAVIA TELEFUNKEN TENOSAL TENSAI THOMAS THOMSON 0068 0068, 0347 0099 0027 0027 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page x Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM U RX-V1700 RX-V1700 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WH63550